Home

Lexmark MS811n

Contents

1. Selecting and storing paper and specialty media Loading paper Configuring printer settings Viewing and printing documents and photos Setting up and using the printer software Configuring the printer on a network Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems User s Guide and Quick Reference Guide The guides are available on the Software and Documentation CD For updates visit our Web site at http support lexmark com Instructions for Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network Troubleshooting printer connection problems Networking Guide Open the Software and Documentation CD and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs folder From the list of publications click the Networking Guide link Overview What are you looking for Help using the printer software 10 Find it here Windows or Mac Help Opena printer software program or application and then click Help Click 23 to view context sensitive information Notes Help is automatically installed with the printer software The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system The latest supplemental information updates and customer support Documentation Driver downloads Live chat support E mail support Voice support Lexmark Support Web site http support lexmark com
2. Printer engine roller maintenance kit 40X7706 Ordering a maintenance kit To identify the supported fuser type view the label on the fuser Do either of the following Remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit The two digit fuser type code such as 00 or 01 can be seen on the front of the fuser Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems Pull down the printer rear door The two digit fuser type code such as 00 or 01 can be seen on the rear of the fuser Notes Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit The separator roller fuser pick rollers and transfer roller are all included in the maintenance kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary For more information on replacing the maintenance kit see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Lexmark Return Program fuser maintenance kits and part numbers for MS810 MS811 and MS812 Fuser maintenance kit type Part number Type 00 40X8420 Type 01 40X8421 Type 02 40X8422 Type 03 40X8423 Type 04 40X8424 J Lexmark regular fuser maintenance kits and part numbers for MS810 MS811 and MS812 Fuser maintenance kit type Part number Type 05 40X8425 Type 06 40X8426 Maintaining the printer 251 Fuser maintenance kit ty
3. Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected User Initiated E mail Kerberos 5 Realm and NTLM Domain appear only in touch screen printer models Device Userid Device Password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain X Security menu Edit Security Setups menu Note This menu appears only in select touch screen printer models Use To Edit Backup Password Create a backup password Use Backup Password Notes Off si Off is the factory default setting for Use Backup Password n M Based This menu appears only if a backup password exists Edit Building Blocks Edit settings for Internal Accounts NTLM Simple Kerberos Setup Kerberos Setup Internal Accounts Active Directory LDAP Password and PIN NTLM Simple Kerberos Setup Kerberos Setup Active Directory LDAP LDAP GSSAPI Password PIN Edit Security Templates Add or edit a security template list of available templates Understanding the printer menus 215 Use To Edit Access Controls Control access to printer menus firmware updates held jobs and other access Administrative Menus points Function Access Management Solutions Cancel jobs at the Device M Miscellaneous Security Settings menu Note This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Use To Login Restrictions Limit the number and time frames of
4. For each icon or button select from the following options Display Do not display Notes Forms and Favorites Background and Idle Screen and Eco Settings appear only in touch screen printer models Display is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Date Format MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD 224 c Format the printer date Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models MM DD YYYY is the US factory default setting Time Format 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Format the printer time Note This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Screen Brightness 20 100 Specify the brightness of the display Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 100isthe factory default setting Output Lighting Normal Standby Mode Off Dim Bright Set the amount of light from the bin Notes f Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper then the factory default setting is Dim f Eco Mode is set to Off or set to Paper then the factory default setting is Bright This menu appears only when an indicator light is installed on the bin or when an optional bin with an indicator light is added Audio Feedback Button Feedback On Off Volume 1 10 Specify whether icons and buttons have audio feedback Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Onisthe fact
5. Screw for attaching the plastic bracket to the ISP ISP solution Screws for attaching the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield 1 2 3 4 M Plastic bracket 4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening a Loosenthe screw b Liftthe metal cover and then pull it out completely 19 Additional printer setup 20 5 Align the posts of the plastic bracket to the holes on the controller board cage and then press the plastic bracket on the controller board cage until it clicks into place Note Make sure that the plastic bracket has latched completely and that the plastic bracket is seated firmly on the controller board cage 6 Install the ISP on the plastic bracket Note Hold the ISP at an angle over the plastic bracket so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the controller board cage Additional printer setup 7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic bracket until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic bracket Note Turn the screw clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place but do not tighten it yet 21 Additional printer setup 22 9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield 10 Tighten the thumbscrew that is attached to the ISP Warning Potential Damage Do not screw it on too tightly 11 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controlle
6. 4 bin mailbox 2 4 bin mailbox Output expander High capacity output expander Staple finisher Caster base None 2100 sheet tray None 550 sheet tray 250 sheet tray 250 sheet tray 550 sheet tray 4 bin mailbox Output expander oOo nT oOo wu amp B w Output expander 4 bin mailbox In a configuration with two or more optional finishers The staple finisher must always be on top The high capacity output expander must always be at the bottom The output expander is the only finisher that can be placed on top of the high capacity output expander The output expander and mailbox may be installed in any order Using MS810de When using optional trays Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with a 2100 sheet tray The 2100 sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration A maximum of four optional trays may be configured with the printer The optional 250 and 550 sheet trays may be installed in any order Using the printer control panel 1e 2c 3o 4e 5u Bio rors uw gwez Om 7 6 5 1 Display View the printer status Set up and operate the printer 2 Home button Go to the home screen 3 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep Mode Press any hard button Pull out Tray 1 or load paper in the multipurpose feeder Op
7. Make sure the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on Yes Go to step 2 XM Turn on the printer Step 2 Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Press the Sleep button to wake the printer from Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Go to step 3 Step 3 Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Go to step 4 Plug one end of the power cord into the printerandthe otherto a properly grounded electrical outlet Troubleshooting 303 in the correct ports Are the cables inserted in the correct ports Action Yes No Step 4 Unplug the other Go to step 5 Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet electrical equipment and then turn on the d rinter If the printer Does other electrical equipment work p p does not work then reconnect the other electrical equipment Step 5 Go to step 6 Make sure to match the Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted following The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies or exte
8. Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Backgrounds Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Do Not Print Note Print is the factory default setting Print r X Image menu Auto Fit Select the optimal paper size scaling and orientation On Note On is the factory default setting It overrides scaling and orientation settings Off for some images Invert Invert bitonal monochrome images On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Scale the image to fit the selected paper size Anchor Top Left Notes Best Fit Anchor Center Best Fit is the factory default setting i j i When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Fit Height Width Fit Height Fit Width Orientation Set the image orientation Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Reverse Portrait Reverse Landscape is A Help menu The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDFs They contain information about using the printer and performing printing tasks English French German and Spanish translations are stored in the printer Other translations are available at http support lexmark com Menu item Description Print All Guides Prints all the guides Print Quality Provides information about solving print quality issues j
9. Pozor Nebezpe enstvo nevidite n ho laserov ho iarenia pri odobrat ch kazet ch a odblokovanej poistke Nevystavujte sa l om PELIGRO Se producen radiaciones l ser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado Evite la exposici n al haz de l ser FARA Osynlig laserstr lning n r patroner tas ur och sp rrmekanismen r upph vd Undvik exponering f r laserstr len ER SPR BRINE EATA AE RHE TEODOR TF SERR EP ER BED E BL Ze TA Bd Pe BA LES ESR EER Fo EIR X hUvZAHSOSAm ARE y 7 MMIC EL MAZEL F HERR EN ET COLO PFT EDRO LT RAV Power consumption Product power consumption See www lexmark com for current values Sleep Mode This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Sleep Mode Timeout Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product in minutes 30 By using the configuration menus the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 180 minutes Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Off mode If this product has an off mode
10. Step 1 a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Checkifthe packing material is properly removed from the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages Yes Go to step 2 327 The problem is solved Step 2 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages Go to step 3 The problem is solved Step 3 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages X Contact customer support The problem is solved Troubleshooting 328 Printer is printing solid black pages Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential
11. You can set two sided printing from the printer software For Windows users Click File Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users Choose File Print and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus Duplex Binding Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed Long Edge Notes Short Edge Long Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Copies Specify the default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Blank Pages Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Collate Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 Notes e 1 1 1 2 2 2 is the factory default setting On stacks the print job in sequence Separator Sheets Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted Off Between Copies Notes Between Jobs None is the factory default setting Between Pages Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then a blank pag
12. b Checkifthe ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the receptacle of the controller board Note The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the controller board are color coded Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly V The problem is solved Contact customer support Mh Troubleshooting 316 USB parallel interface card does not operate correctly Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Check if you have a Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed supported USB or arallel interface card a Install the USB or parallel interface card For more information see P Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 18 Note A USB or parallel b Print a menu settings page and then check if the USB or parallel interface card from interface card is listed in the Installed Options list another printer may not work on this i i printer Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Options list Step 2 Contact customer Connect the cable to Check if you are using the correct cable and if it is connected securely to Support the USB or parallel the USB or parallel interface card interface card connector Is the correct cable securely connected to the USB or parallel interface card Paper feed problems Jammed pages are not reprinted Action Yes No a Turn on jam recovery The problem is solved Co
13. select a print job type 2 Using MS810de 118 Use To Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Note When the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs inthe computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies It lets you examine if the first copy is satisfactory or not The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time Note The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu Notes Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs e You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs V S Touch v Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are he
14. Notes When activated all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn off or reset the printer Coverage Estimator Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page The estimate is Off printed on a separate page at the end of each print job On Note Off is the factory default setting XPS menu Print Error Pages Print a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Off Note Off is the factory default setting On PDF menu Scale to Fit Scale page content to fit the selected paper size Yes Note No is the factory default setting No Understanding the printer menus 239 Annotations Print annotations in a PDF Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print PostScript menu Use To Print PS Error Print a page containing the PostScript error On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Lock PS Startup Mode Disable the SysStart file On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Font Priority Establish the font search order Resident Notes Flash Disk Resident is the factory default setting This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read wri
15. Notification Description Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs E mail Only The printer generates an e mail when the supply condition is reached The status of the supply will appear on the menus page and status page Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an email about the status of the supply The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached Continuable Stop The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached and the user needs to press a button to continue printing Non Continuable Stopt The printer stops when the supply condition is reached The supply must be replaced to continue printing 1 The printer generates an e mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage 4 Click Submit Modifying confidential print settings Note This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Configuration gt Other Settings tab gt Security gt Confidential Print Set
16. Paper Menu Custom Names 3 Select a custom name and then type a custom paper type name 4 Click Submit 5 Click Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to A gt Paper Menu gt Custom Names 2 Select a custom name and then type a custom paper type name Using MS810de 114 3 Touch v 4 Touch Custom Types and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Assigning a custom paper type Using the Embedded Web Server Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types 3 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to VE Paper Menu Custom Types 2 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom nam
17. Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved a Loadthe specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved Step 4 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints V Contact customer support The problem is solved Incorrect margins on prints N ABC DEF Action Step 1 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded b Resend the print job Are the margins correct NS Yes The problem is solved r Go to step 2 Troubleshooting a Action Step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper size in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray Yes Go to step 3 322 a Do one or more of the following Specify the paper si
18. Try one or more of the following Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct size and type of paper Depending on your printer model touch Continue or press OK to clear the message and continue printing Note If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or OK is selected then the printer manually overrides the request and then prints from an automatically selected tray Cancel the current job Maintenance kit low 80 xy You may need to order a maintenance kit For more information contact customer support at http support lexmark com or your service representative If necessary select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy For more information contact customer support at http support lexmark com or your service representative If necessary select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Maintenance kit very low 80 xy You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon For more information contact customer support at http support lexmark com or your service representative If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Memory full 38 Try one or more of the following From the pr
19. see Avoiding jams on page 261 and Storing paper on page 183 Setting the paper size and type From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select a paper size or type gt Submit Notes The paper size is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder The paper size for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu The paper type must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper Configuring Universal paper settings Universal paper size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Notes The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm 2 76 x 5 inches for one sided printing and 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 inches for two sided duplex printing The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches for one sided and two sided printing 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Universal Setup gt Units of Measure gt select a unit of measure 2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height 3 Select the width or height and then touch Submit Using MS812de 143 Loading the 250 or 550 sheet tray CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1
20. x page jam clear manual feeder 250 273 x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 200 201 265 x page jam open tray x 24x 272 x page jam open upper and lower rear door 231 234 269 x page jam open upper rear door 202 268 x page jam remove paper open expander rear door Leave paper in bin 43y xx 281 x page jam remove paper open finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451 278 x page jam remove paper open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 41y xx 279 x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 274 x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 271 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 271 A accessing the Embedded Web Server 92 139 Active NIC menu 201 adjusting brightness Embedded Web Server 126 173 printer control panel 126 printer display 173 adjusting display brightness 126 173 adjusting printer display brightness 80 adjusting Sleep mode 79 125 172 adjusting toner darkness 69 115 163 administrator settings Embedded Web Server 74 AppleTalk menu 206 attaching cables 33 available internal options 13 avoiding jams 183 avoiding paper jams 261 B Background and Idle Screen using 93 140 Bin Setup menu 199 buttons printer control panel 47 88 buttons touch screen using 90 136 C cables Ethernet 33 USB 33 canceling print job from computer 74 120 167 cance
21. 2 Touch the print job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder a Click o or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type control printers C Press Enter or click OK 2 Double click the printer icon 3 Select the print job you want to cancel 4 Click Delete Using MS812de 168 For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple Menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Fax gt select a printer gt Open Print Queue System Preferences gt Print amp Scan gt select a printer gt Open Print Queue 2 From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel and then click Delete Managing your printer Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Checking the virtual display 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f
22. 297 Remove paper from linked set bin name 297 Remove paper from all bins 297 Remove paper from bin x 297 Remove paper from standard output bin 297 Replace cartridge 0 estimated pages remain 88 xy 297 Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy 297 Replace imaging unit O estimated pages remain 84 xy 298 Replace maintenance kit O estimated pages remain 80 xy 298 Replace missing cartridge 31 xy 298 Replace missing imaging unit 31 xy 298 Replace missing or unresponsive fuser 31 xy 296 Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy 298 Replace unsupported fuser 32 xy 299 Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy 299 Restore held jobs 299 Serial option x error 54 299 Serial port x disabled 56 299 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 300 Some held jobs were not restored 300 Standard network software error 54 300 Standard USB port disabled 56 300 Supply needed to complete job 300 Too many bins attached 58 300 Too many disks installed 58 301 Too many flash options installed 58 301 Too many trays attached 58 301 Unformatted flash detected 53 301 Unsupported disk 301 Unsupported option in slot x 55 301 Unsupported USB hub please remove 287 USB port x disabled 56 302 printer options troubleshooting internal option is not detected 313 internal print server 314 Internal Solutions Port 315 tray problems 314 USB parallel interface card 316 pri
23. 5 Do either of the following Click Update Now Ask Printer Under Configuration Options manually add any installed hardware options 6 Click Apply For Macintosh users 1 From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences Print amp Scan select your printer Options amp Supplies Driver System Preferences Print amp Fax select your printer Options amp Supplies Driver 2 Add any installed hardware options and then click OK Additional printer setup 37 Networking Notes Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network For information on installing the wireless network adapter see the instruction sheet that came with the adapter AService Set Identifier SSID is a name assigned to a wireless network Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 and 802 1X RADIUS are types of security used on a network Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network organize the following information before you begin Note If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers continue on to installing the printer e A valid unique IP address for the printer to use on the network The network gateway The network mask Anickname for the printer optional Note A printer nickname can make it e
24. 5 Load the paper or specialty media Note Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Without an optional staple finisher One sided printing One sided printing Two sided duplex printing Two sided duplex printing Using MS810de 112 Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams 6 For custom or universal size paper adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack 7 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS810de 113 Linking and unlinking trays Linking and unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then typ
25. For more information contact customer support Standard USB port disabled 56 From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Notes The printer discards any data received through the USB port Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled Supply needed to complete job A supply needed to complete the job is missing Cancel the current job Too many bins attached 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra bins 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Troubleshooting 301 Too many disks installed 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra printer hard disks 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Too many flash options installed 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra flash memory 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Too many trays attached 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra trays 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Unformatted flash detected 53 Try o
26. Note Select your country or region and then select your product to view the appropriate support site Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster Machine Type number Serial number Date purchased Store where purchased Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region n the US See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or at http support lexmark com In other countries and regions See the printed warranty that came with your printer Selecting a location for the printer 11 Selecting a location for the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to install any hardware options then leave enough room for them also It is important to Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 15
27. Using the printer control panel so eee e a a Rete AR P NUT POTE Gates 134 Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights 134 Understanding the home screen cccccsssssssceecesssseceeeescesseececessssusesessscaseecesssaseeeceseecsseeesesesauaeeaeesesesesueeeeens 135 Using the xtouch screen b ttons i b te pe pee a ib id RED RED d CART PESE Rin 136 Setting up and using the home screen Applications c ccccccccssssssssssseecceceescesesenssseeeceeecssesensnsaeeeeeeees 139 Accessing the Embedded Web Server sess esee nennen nenne nnne tenete nenne nensis nenne ne sensisse nnne 139 Customizing the home screen iode cited reote eee edere o a aae a Aaaa Eaa enaA Eria 139 Activating the home screen applications eese eene nennen nennen nnne nn nennen nnne nnne 139 Exporting and importing a CONFIQUrAtTION ccccsscscccesesssseeceeeseseuseceseseeeceesessaseecesesesseseeceseesuseses rennen nnns 141 Loading paper and specialty MeCia cccessssssscceeceeceeccsssueseeceeeeescesesnesnsaeeseeeeeecessesesesaueaseseeeeeeeeeeens 142 Setting the paper size and type ne emen estet dette bed eite diete et a eee seta 142 Configuring Universal paper settings eene eene nennen ener rsen nen nnns nne n n sene n sene i a ian 142 Loading the 250 or 550 sheet tray cccesssscccscsssseceecssssseeeeccssssseeecesessssesceeseeseeeeseseseeeeesseseuseeeeesessaeseseneeees 143 Loading the 2
28. and then resend it f you are printing PDF files then generate a new file and then print it again Did the jobs print Yes The problem is solved 305 EEEEEN Go to step 3 Step 3 a Increase the printer memory Do one or more of the following Delete some print jobs Install additional printer memory b Resend the print job Did the jobs print s The problem is solved Contact customer support Envelope seals when printing Action a Use envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment Note Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can seal the flaps b Resend the print job Does the envelope seal when printing NS Yes Contact customer support s T The problem is solved Error message about reading the flash drive appears Action Step 1 Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB slot Note The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB slot Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB slot Yes Go to step 2 M Insert the flash drive into the front USB slot Step 2 Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green Note A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy Is the indicator light blinking green M Wait until the printer is ready then view the held jobs list and then print the documents Go to step
29. and weight in texture and weight to the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray match the paper loaded in the tray Is the tray set to the type texture and weight of the paper loaded Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved Step 4 Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper From the printer control panel change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on Go to step 5 Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Go to step 6 The problem is solved Step 6 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Go to step 7 The problem is solved Step 7 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Contact customer support Is the print still too light The problem is solved Troubleshooting Printer is printing blank pages Action
30. b Click and then navigate to AppleTalk select the printer Add Setting up serial printing Use serial printing to print even when the computer is far from the printer or to print at a reduced speed After installing the serial or communication COM port configure the printer and the computer Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer 1 Set the parameters in the printer a From the printer control panel navigate to the menu for the port settings b Locate the menu for the serial port settings and then adjust the settings if necessary c Save the modified settings and then print a menu settings page 2 Install the printer driver a Insert the Software and Documentation CD Additional printer setup 43 0 Qa a C g If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually 1 Click o or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type D setup exe where Dis the letter of the CD or DVD drive 3 Press Enter or click OK Click Install Follow the instructions on the computer screen Select Advanced and then click Continue From the Configure Printer Connection dialog select a port If the port is not in the list then click Refresh or navigate to Add port select a port type enter the necessary information OK Click Continue Finish 3 Setthe COM port parameters After installing the printer driver
31. except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit http support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads visit www lexmark com If you don t have access to the Internet you can contact Lexmark by mail Lexmark International Inc Bldg 004 2 CSC 740 New Circle Road NW Lexington KY 40550 USA 2012 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved Notices 340 GOVERNMENT END USERS The Software Program and any related documentation are Commercial Items as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7207 4 as applicable the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U S Government end users a only as Commerical Items and b with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is He
32. more information see the setup documentation that came with the tray s Troubleshooting a Action Step 4 Check if the tray is available in the printer driver Note If necessary manually add the tray in the printer driver to make i available for print jobs For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 36 Is the tray available in the printer driver Yes Go to step 5 t 315 oe Manually add the tray in the printer driver Step 5 Check if the option is selected a From the application you are using select the option For Mac OS X version 9 users make sure the printer is set up in Chooser b Resend the print job Is the tray working S The problem is solved Contact customer support Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly Action Step 1 Make sure the Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed a Install the ISP For more information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 18 b Print a menu settings page and then check if the ISP is listed in the Installed Options list Is the ISP listed in the Installed Options list Yes Go to step 2 M r Check if you have a supported ISP Note An ISP from another printer may not work on this printer Step 2 Check the cable and the ISP connection a Usethe correct cable and then make sure it is securely connected to the ISP
33. on page 142 Warning Potential Damage Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured Creating a custom name for a paper type Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Paper Menu Custom Names 3 Select a custom name and then type a custom paper type name 4 Click Submit 5 Click Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to Paper Menu Custom Names 2 Select a custom name and then type a custom paper type name Using MS812de 162 3 Touch Submit 4 Touch Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Assigning a custom paper type Using the Embedded Web Server Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes Vi
34. parity and data bits are set correctly on the printer and computer From the printer control panel select Continue to continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Turn off the printer and then turn it back on Serial port x disabled 56 Try one or more of the following Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port Select Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is set to Enabled Troubleshooting 300 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Note If the message appears again then contact your system support person Some held jobs were not restored Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Note Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible Standard network software error 54 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Turn off the printer and then turn it back on Update the network firmware in the printer or print server
35. press OK to confirm Remove paper from linked set bin name Remove paper from the specified bin The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then select Continue on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the paper stack from the standard bin The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then select Continue on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Replace cartridge 0 estimated pages remain 88 xy Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement cartridge then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer x indicates the value of the printer region y indicates the value of the cartridge region x and y can have the following values Troubleshooting 298 List of printer and toner cartridge regions Region number Region 0 Global 1 Unit
36. see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement cartridge then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Troubleshooting 299 Replace unsupported fuser 32 xy Remove the fuser and then install a supported one For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the part Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy Remove the imaging unit and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement imaging unit then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Restore held jobs Try one or more of the following Select Restore on the printer control panel to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Select Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Serial option x error 54 Try one or more of the following Make sure that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port Make sure that the serial interface parameters protocol baud
37. 11 12 selecting paper 181 Serial x menu 210 Serial option x error 54 299 Serial port x disabled 56 299 serial printing setting up 42 Set Date and Time menu 217 setting paper size 48 95 142 paper type 48 95 142 TCP IP address 204 setting the Universal paper size 48 95 142 setting up serial printing 42 setting up the printer on an Ethernet network Macintosh only 37 on an Ethernet network Windows only 37 Setup menu 231 shipping the printer 260 showing icons on the home screen 92 139 Sleep button printer control panel 47 88 134 Sleep mode adjusting 79 125 172 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 300 SMTP Setup menu 213 Some held jobs were not restored 300 standard 250 sheet tray loading 49 143 standard 550 sheet tray loading 49 95 143 Standard Network menu 201 Standard network software error 54 300 standard tray loading 49 95 143 Standard USB menu 207 Standard USB port disabled 56 300 staple cartridge replacing 256 staple cartridges ordering 250 362 statement of volatility 82 128 175 status of parts checking 123 170 status of parts and supplies checking 77 status of supplies checking 123 170 Stop or Cancel button printer control panel 47 88 134 storing paper 183 supplies 251 storing print jobs 71 117 165 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 330 streaked vertical lines appear on prints 331 streaks appear 335 Substitute Size menu 193 supplies
38. 2 C Shipping and storage temperature 10 C 43 3 C Laser notice The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class IIIb 3b laser that is nominally a 10 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787 800 nanometers The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Laser advisory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown Notices 343 DANGER Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated Avoid exposure to laser beam PERIGO Radia o a laser invis vel ser liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido Evite a exposi o aos feixes de laser Opasnost Nevidljivo lasersko zra enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poni tena sigurnosna veza Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima NEBEZPE Kdy jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokov na pojistka ze za zen je vys l no neviditeln laserov z en Nevystavujte se p soben laserov ho paprsku FARE Usynlig laserstraling n r patroner fjernes og sp rreanordnin
39. 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 273 3 Insert the tray 4 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch v or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt ok x page jam clear manual feeder 250 1 From the multipurpose feeder firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 274 2 Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges ona level surface 3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder 4 Slide the paper guide until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper 5 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch v or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt E x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 1 From the stapler bin firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 275 2 Open the stapler door 3 Pull down the latch of the staple cartridge holder and then pull the hold
40. 208 PCL Emul 239 PDF 238 PostScript 239 358 Print Settings 229 Quality 235 Reports 200 Security Audit Log 217 Serial x 210 Set Date and Time 217 Setup 231 SMTP Setup menu 213 Standard Network 201 Standard USB 207 Substitute Size 193 TCP IP 204 Universal Setup 198 Utilities 237 Wireless 206 XPS 238 Miscellaneous menu 215 moving the printer 11 12 258 260 multipurpose feeder loading 62 108 156 N Network x menu 201 Network x software error 54 293 Network Card menu 203 Network Reports menu 203 network settings Embedded Web Server 74 network setup page printing 77 122 170 Networking Guide where to find 74 120 168 noise printer reducing 78 124 Non Lexmark supply type see User s Guide 33 xy 294 non volatile memory 82 128 175 erasing 83 129 176 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 294 notices 340 346 0 341 342 342 342 342 342 343 343 343 347 347 347 347 348 349 number of remaining pages estimate 248 0 optional 250 sheet tray loading 49 95 143 Index optional 550 sheet tray loading 49 95 143 optional card installing 23 options 2100 sheet tray installing 31 250 sheet tray installing 31 550 sheet tray installing 31 firmware cards 13 Internal Solutions Port installing 18 memory card 13 17 printer hard disk installing 24 printer hard disk removing 29 updating in printer driver 36 ordering imaging unit 249 maintenance kit 250 r
41. 3 M Troubleshooting a 306 Check if the flash drive is supported For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives see Supported flash drives and file types on page 70 for non touch screen printer models types on page 116 and Supported flash drives and file types on page 164 Does the error message still appear For touch screen printer models see Supported flash drives and file Action Yes Noo Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Check for an error message on the display b Clear the message Does the error message still appear Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved Step 5 Check if the USB slot is disabled by the system support person Does the error message still appear XX Contact customer support The problem is solved Incorrect characters print Action Step 1 Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode Note If Ready Hex appears on the printer display then turn off the printer and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode Is the printer in Hex Trace mode Yes Deactivate Hex Trace mode M Go to step 2 Step 2 a From the printer control panel select Standard Network or Network x and then set SmartSwitch to On b Resend the print job Do incorrect characters print N Contact customer support The problem is solved Job prints from the wrong tray
42. Button menu select Hibernate and then touch Submit Adjusting the brightness of the printer display To save energy or if you are have trouble reading from the display adjust the brightness of the display Select from 20 to 100 The factory default setting is 100 Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings General Settings Using MS812de 174 3 In the Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Screen Brightness 2 In the Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display and then touch Submit Restoring factory default settings If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings For more information see Printing a menu settings page on page 170 If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings then perform the Wipe All Settings option
43. Description The application lets you customize the background and idle screen of your printer home screen r s 1 From the home screen navigate to Change Background select background to use 2 Touch v Setting up Forms and Favorites Description The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen Note The printer must have permission to access the network folder FTP site or Web site where the bookmark is stored From the computer where the bookmark is stored use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system V P 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Forms and Favorites 3 Define the bookmarks and then customize the settings 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen and then navigate through form categories or search for forms based on a form number name or description Using MS810de 94 Understanding Eco Settings Icon Description The application l
44. Disk Encryption menu select Enable Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 85 Notes Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Navigate to Disk Encryption gt Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Select Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes Do notturn off the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks Astatus bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the screen for enabling or disabling disk encryption 5 Navigate to Back Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Finding printer security information In high security environments
45. Ethernet network 37 print irregularities 323 print job canceling from the printer control panel 73 canceling from computer 74 120 167 print quality troubleshooting blank pages 327 characters have jagged edges 318 clipped pages or images 318 359 compressed images appear on prints 319 gray background on prints 320 horizontal voids appear on prints 320 print irregularities 323 print is too dark 324 print is too light 325 printer is printing solid black pages 328 repeating defects appear on prints 328 shadow images appear on prints 329 skewed print 330 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 330 streaked vertical lines 331 toner fog or background shading appears on prints 333 toner rubs off 333 toner specks appear on prints 333 transparency print quality is poor 334 uneven print density 335 white streaks 335 Print Settings menu 229 print troubleshooting envelope seals when printing 305 error reading flash drive 305 held jobs do not print 304 incorrect characters print 306 incorrect margins on prints 321 jammed pages are not reprinted 316 job prints from wrong tray 306 job prints on wrong paper 306 jobs do not print 309 Large jobs do not collate 307 multiple language PDF files do not print 308 paper curl 322 paper frequently jams 317 print job takes longer than expected 308 tray linking does not work 310 unexpected page breaks occur 311 printer configurations 45 86 132 finishing features 185 minimum cleara
46. For more information see Erasing non volatile memory on page 176 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Factory Defaults gt Restore Now gt Submit Using MS812de 175 Securing the memory before moving the printer Using the security lock feature The printer is equipped with a security lock feature When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached the printer is locked When locked the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be removed Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings and user data Type of memory Description Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs Non volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information bookmark settings and emb
47. Go to step 5 The problem is solved Step 5 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Contact customer support at http support lexmar k com or your service representative The problem is solved Troubleshooting 333 Toner specks appear on prints Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Contact customer The problem is solved support Do toner specks appear on prints Toner fog or background shading appears on prints Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints Step 2 The problem is solved Contact customer Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints NS Toner rubs off D Leading edge ABC x Trailing edge Troubleshooting Action Step 1 and weight Do the paper type and weight match the paper loaded in the tray From the Paper menu on the printer control panel check t
48. MS811dn MS812dn 81 Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings General Settings 3 In the Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Restoring factory default settings If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings For more information see Printing a menu settings page on page 76 If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings then perform the Wipe All Settings option For more information see Erasing non volatile memory on page 83 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or in the printer hard disk are not affected From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings E gt Settings gt OK gt General Settings gt OK gt Factory Defaults gt OK gt Restore Now gt OK Using MS810n MS810dn MS811
49. Make sure all paper fragments are removed 6 Insert the standard tray Clearing jams 271 7 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing Fortouch screen printer models touch ZS or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt E3 gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 1 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 2 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch v or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt E x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 1 Pull out the tray completely Note Lift the tray slightly and pull it out 2 Push down the front duplex flap then firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull the paper to the right and out of the printer Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 272 3 Insert the tray 4 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch ZS or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt ok x page jam open tray x 24x 1 Check which tray is indicated on the printer display and then pull the tray i
50. Off Auto Auto is the factory default setting On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol ENA Address Set the network address information for an external print server YYY YYY YYV YYY Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask Set the netmask information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Gateway Set the gateway information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Parallel x menu Note This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed Understanding the printer menus Use 209 To PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job rec
51. Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Quiet Mode 3 Select a setting Use To On Reduce printer noise Notes Print jobs process at a reduced speed Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There is a short delay before the first page is printed The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off The printer will ignore the Advance Start command Off Use factory default settings Note This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer Rs F 4 Click Submit Adjusting Sleep mode To save energy decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep mode Select from 1 to 120 minutes The factory default setting is 30 minutes Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Clic
52. Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type D setup exe where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive C Press Enter or click OK 3 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Additional printer setup 36 For Macintosh users 1 Close all open applications 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute then click the CD icon on the desktop 3 Double click the software installer package and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Note To take advantage of the full features of your printer select the custom install option and then select all packages listed Using the Internet 1 Goto the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com 2 Navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOADS gt select your printer gt select your operating system 3 Download the printer driver and then install the printer software Updating available options in the printer driver When the printer software and any hardware options are installed you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder a Click o or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type control printers C Press Enter or click OK 2 Select the printer 3 Right click the printer and then select Properties 4 Click the Configuration tab
53. Status More Details Saving energy Using Eco Mode 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings General Settings Eco Mode 3 Select a setting Use To off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode Notes Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory default settings Off supports the performance specifications of the printer Energy Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle Notes Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity The printer display is turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes Plain Paper Enable the automatic two sided duplex printing feature 4 Click Submit Using MS812de 172 Reducing printer noise Enable Quiet mode to reduce printer noise 1
54. XX Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 2 menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper Yes Go to step 3 319 a Do one or more of the following Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Go to step 4 The problem is solved Step 4 a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge 2 Remove the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped X Contact customer support The problem is solved Compressed images appear on prints a Action a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser type Note To identify the fuser type view the label on the fuser b Resend the print job Do compressed
55. by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna ncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to Director of Lexmark Technology amp Services Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 859 232 3000 Notices 347 Industry Canada compliance statement This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe B es
56. configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray or more than one input option If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unpack the optional tray and then remove all packing material Additional printer setup 3 Pull out the tray and then remove any packing material from inside the tray 4 Insert the tray 5 Place the tray near the printer 32 Additional printer setup 6 Align the printer with the tray and then slowly lower the printer into place 7 Turn the printer back on Note When the printer software and any optional trays are installed you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 36 Attaching cables CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as a power cord a fax feature or USB cable during a lightning storm Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable Make sure to match the following The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port 33 Additional print
57. correct paper type and weight in the tray Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray Step 2 Go to step 3 Change the paper From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded bs loaded in the tray to match the paper type and weight specified in the tray settings Troubleshooting a Action Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do shadow images still appear on prints Yes Go to step 4 330 a The problem is solved Step 4 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do shadow images still appear on prints N Contact customer support The problem is solved Skewed print Action Step 1 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded b Resend the print job Is the print still skewed Yes Go to step 2 z The problem is solved Step 2 a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray b Resend the print job Is the print still skewed X Contact customer support The problem is solved Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Troubleshooting Action 3
58. data during simple print jobs Non volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information bookmark settings and embedded solutions Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard diskis designed for device specific functionality This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs as well as form data and font data Ns P i Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances The printer is being decommissioned The printer hard disk is being replaced The printer is being moved to a different department or location The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization The printer is being removed from your premises for service The printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a printer hard disk Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises Degaussing Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and r
59. either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray or more than one input option If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Using MS812de 133 The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional finishers and trays that are supported by the printer For more information on other configurations visit http support lexmark com 8 Hardware option Alternative hardware option 1 Staple finisher Output expander 4 bin mailbox 2 4 bin mailbox Output expander High capacity output expander Staple finisher Caster base None 2100 sheet tray None 550 sheet tray 250 sheet tray 250 sheet tray 550 sheet tray 4 bin mailbox Output expander oOo nT oOo wu amp B w Output expander 4 bin mailbox In a configuration with two or more optional finishers The staple finisher must always be on top The high capacity output expander must always be at the bottom The output expander is the only finisher that can be placed on top of the high capacity output expander The output expander and mailbox may be installed in any order Using MS812de When using optional trays Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with a 2100 sheet tray The 2100 sheet tray must alw
60. factory default setting f multiple bins are assigned the same name then the name only appears once in the bin list x can be any number between 1 and 12 if the appropriate optional bins are installed Assign Type Bin Plain Paper Bin Card Stock Bin Transparency Bin Recycled Bin Labels Bin Vinyl Labels Bin Bond Bin Envelope Bin Rough Envelope Bin Letterhead Bin Preprinted Bin Colored Bin Light Paper Bin Heavy Paper Bin Rough Cotton Bin Custom x Bin Select a bin for each supported paper type For each type select the following options Disabled Standard Bin Bin x Notes Disabled is the factory default setting x can be any number between 1 and 12 if the appropriate optional bins are installed f multiple bins are assigned the same name then the name only appears once in the bin list Reports menu Reports menu Use Menu Settings Page cA mRE Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays installed memory total page count alarms timeouts printer control panel language TCP IP address status of supplies status of the network connection and other information Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly Note This menu appears only if an optional
61. factory default setting Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs Understanding the printer menus Use Timeouts Job Hold Timeout 5 255 sec 227 oO Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue Notes 30 sec is the factory default setting This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Error Recovery Auto Reboot Reboot when idle Reboot always Reboot never Max Auto Reboots 1 20 Set the printer to restart when an error is encountered Notes Reboot always is the factory default setting for Auto Reboot 5 is the factory default setting for Max Auto Reboots fthe printer performs the same number of automatic reboots that is set in the printer within a certain amount of time then the printer shows the applicable error instead of rebooting Error Recovery Max Auto Reboots 1 20 Setthe number of automatic reboots that the printer can perform Notes 5 is the factory default setting e Ifthe printer performs a number of automatic reboots that is the same as the menu setting within a certain amount of time then the printer displays the applicable error instead of rebooting Print Recovery Auto Continue Disabled 5 255 Let t
62. information Primary SMTP Gateway Port Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Secondary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Port SMTP Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to 5 30 send an e mail Note 30 is the factory default setting Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e mail sent by the printer Use SSL Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the Disabled SMTP server Negotiate Notes Required Disabled is the factory default setting When the Negotiate setting is used the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used SMTP Server Authentication Specify the type of user authentication required for printing privileges No authentication required Note No authentication required is the factory default setting Login Plain CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 X Understanding the printer menus Use Device Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials 214 ao Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e mail Notes User Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials Use Session User ID amp Password Use Session E mail address amp Password Prompt User None is the factory default setting for Device Initiated E mail and User Initiated E mail
63. its place If the A5 length guide is not attached then proceed to step d c Putthe A5 length guide in its holder Using MS812de 153 d Squeeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper is loaded properly There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Using MS812de One sided printing One sided printing Two sided printing Two sided printing 154 Using MS812de 155 Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator i Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams 5 Insert the tray Note Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray Using MS812de 156 6 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Loading the multipurpose feeder 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door Note Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing Using MS812de 157 2 Using the handle pull the multipurpose feeder exte
64. network list of zones available on the network Note The default zone for the network is the factory default setting Standard USB menu r Use To PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then process it appropriately The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting
65. network adapter any connector the memory device or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device Loss of data can occur 2 From the printer control panel touch the document you want to print 3 Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing and then touch Print Notes Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing f you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then touch Held Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to m gt Security gt Confidential Print gt select the print job type Use To Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Note When the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 1 9 Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory Using MS812de 166 Use To Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory The
66. not saved Banner Page Allow the printer to print a banner page Off Note Off is the factory default setting On NS A TCP IP menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt TCP IP Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt TCP IP Note This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers Use To Set Hostname Set the current TCP IP host name Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server IP Address View or change the current TCP IP address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask View or change the current TCP IP netmask Gateway View or change the current TCP IP gateway Enable DHCP Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable RARP Specify the RARP address assignment setting On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Enable BOOTP Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable AutoIP Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable FTP TFTP Enablethe built in FTP server which lets you send files tothe printer usin
67. o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka Sis izstradajums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje Ze tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistve
68. or more of the following Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper Depending on your printer model touch Continue or press OK to clear the message and continue printing Note If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or OK is selected then the printer automatically overrides the request and then prints from an automatically selected tray Cancel the current job Load manual feeder with custom type name paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct size and type of paper Depending on your printer model touch Continue or press OK to clear the message and continue printing Note If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or OK is selected then the printer manually overrides the request and then prints from an automatically selected tray Cancel the current job Load manual feeder with paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct size of paper Depending on your printer model touch Continue or press OK to clear the message and continue printing Note If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or OK is selected then the printer manually overrides the request and then prints from an automatically selected tray Cancel the current job Troubleshooting 293 Load manual feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation
69. or on the wrong paper Action Step 1 a Checkif you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper NS Yes The problem is solved M NE Go to step 2 M Troubleshooting a 307 a Depending on your operating system open Printing Preferences or the Print dialog and then specify the paper type b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Action Yes No Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Step 3 The problem is solved Go to step 4 Step 4 a Check if the trays are not linked b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper X The problem is solved Contact customer support Large jobs do not collate Action a From the printer software set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 Note Setting Collate to 1 1 1 2 2 2 in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu b Resend the print job Did the job print and collate correctly Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel set Collate to 1 2
70. primary contributor up to 80 of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device from design to end of life This is due to the energy intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper Thus Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper Using recycled paper is one way Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another Lexmark is well equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste In addition the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers although a converter s product list for special applications is maintained However the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing 1 Minimize paper consumption 2 3 Paper and specialty media guide 183 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council FSC or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification PEFC These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs normal 75 or 80 g m certified paper lower weight paper or recycled paper Unacceptable pap
71. printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the current job Load paper source with paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper To use the tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Note If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the current job Troubleshooting 292 Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper To use the tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Note If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the current job Load manual feeder with custom string paper orientation Try one
72. problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Step 6 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support at http support lexmar k com or your service representative Do print irregularities still appear V Print is too dark IN ABC DEF Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel reduce the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Step 2 Go to step 3 Do one or more of the a From the printer control panel set the paper type texture and weight following in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Specify the paper b Resend the print job type texture and weight from the tray settings to Is the t t to the type texture and weight of the paper loaded M Md g pap match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type texture and weight specified in the tray settings Troubleshooting a Action Step 3 and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark a Depending o
73. r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licence cet appareil doit tre utilis l int rieur et loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industry Canada Notice to users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Notices 353 Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product i
74. remove the bracket b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP and then press the printer hard disk down until the standoffs are in place Installation warning Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly Do not touch or press on the center of the printer hard disk Doing so may cause damage c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 27 To install a printer hard disk directly on the controller board cage a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the controller board cage and then press the printer hard disk down until the standoffs are in place Installation warning Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly Do not touch or press on the center of the printer hard disk Doing so may cause damage Additional printer setup b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded JIMNY 28 Additional printer setup 29 Removing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting
75. remove the finishers individually from the printer Notes Make sure to remove the topmost finisher first Toremove the finisher hold the finisher on both sides and then lift the latches to unlock the finisher Maintaining the printer 259 f the printer does not have a caster base then remove the optional trays Note Slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until it clicks into place Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Maintaining the printer 260 Moving the printer to another location The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware options Keep the printer in an upright position Avoid severe jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging or call the place of purc
76. server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Click e or click Start and then click Run In the Start Search or Run dialog type control printers Press Enter or click OK Locate the printer that has changed Note If there is more than one copy of the printer then update all of them with the new IP address Right click the printer Click Properties Ports tab Additional printer setup 42 8 Select the port from the list and then click Configure Port 9 Type the new IP address in the Printer Name or IP Address field 10 Click OK gt Close For Macintosh users 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer control panel The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Add the printer For IP printing a From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences Print amp Scan System Preferences Print amp Fax b Click C Click the IP tab d Type the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Notes Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10 5 a From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print amp Fax
77. set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver Note Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer a Open Device Manager 1 Click or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type devmgmt msc 3 Press Enter or click OK Click beside Ports to expand the list of available ports Right click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer example COM1 and then click Properties On the Port Settings tab set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings Click OK and then close all the dialogs Print a test page to verify printer installation Verifying printer setup When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following Menu settings page Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and then install it again For more information see the following Printing a menu settings page on page 76 for non touch screen printer models Printing a menu settings page on page 122 or Printing a m
78. staple finisher is installed Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Note This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected to print servers A Understanding the printer menus 201 Use To Network x Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes This menu item is available only when more than one network option is installed This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected to print servers Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer Note This menu item appears only when LDSS is enabled Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in PCL Fonts the printer PostScript Fonts Note A separate list is available for PCL and PostScript emulations Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk Notes Job Buffer Size must be set to 10096 Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed correctly and working properly This menu item appears only when an optional flash drive or printer hard disk is installed Asset Report Print a report containing printer asset information such as serial number and model na
79. the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter and then look for the network name If you cannot find the SSID or the security information for your network then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact your system support person To find the WPA WPA2 preshared key passphrase for the wireless network see the documentation that came with the access point see the Web page associated with the access point or consult your system support person Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Wi Fi Protected Setup Before connecting the printer to a wireless network make sure that The access point wireless router is Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS certified or WPS compatible For more information see the documentation that came with your access point A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter Additional printer setup 40 Using the Push Button Configuration method 1 Depending on your printer model navigate to either of the following gt Settings gt E3 gt Networks Ports gt E3 gt Network x gt OK gt Network x Setup gt OK gt Wireless gt OK gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt OK gt Start Push Button Method Ns Network Ports Network x Network x Setup
80. the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Sleep Button Settings 3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop down menu select Hibernate 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to VR Settings General Settings 2 Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button 3 Touch Hibernate v Adjusting the brightness of the display To save energy or if you are have trouble reading your display adjust the brightness of the display Available settings range from 20 100 The factory default setting is 100 Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings General Settings 3 In the Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Using MS810de 127 Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to au Settings gt General Settings gt Screen Brightness 2 In the Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 3 Touch v Restoring factory default settings If you want to keep a list of the curren
81. the flash drive Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Security gt OK gt Confidential Print gt select the print job type Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 72 Print job type Max Invalid PIN Description Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Note When the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Confidential Job Expiration Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 Repeat Job Expiration Lets you print and store print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting Verify Job Expiration Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed Reserve Job Expiration Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu Notes process additional held jobs control panel Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to You can set the printer to store print jobs in t
82. the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 280 3 Close the rear mailbox door 4 Ifthe jam is in the mailbox bin then firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Notes Make sure all paper fragments are removed When using A4 folio or legal size paper make sure to adjust the bin extender so that the paper enters the bin properly e Clearing jams 281 5 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch P or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK x page jam remove paper open expander rear door Leave paper in bin 43y xx 1 Open the rear output expander door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 282 3 Close the rear output expander door 4 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch v or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK Troubleshooting 283 Troubleshooting Understanding the printer messages Cartridge imaging unit mismatch 41 xy 1 Check if the toner cartridge and imaging unit are both MICR Magnetic Imaging Conten
83. the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Labels Vinyl Labels Envelope is S Custom Names menu Custom Name x Specify a custom name for a paper type This name replaces the Custom Type x name in the printer menus Note This menu item appears only in touch screen printer models Custom Bin Names menu Note This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Standard Bin Specify a custom name for the standard bin Bin x Specify a custom name for Bin x Universal Setup menu Use To Units of Measure Identify the units of measure Inches Notes Millimeters Inches is the US factory default setting Millimeters is the international factory default setting Portrait Width Set the portrait width 3 8 5 inches Notes 76 216 mm If the width exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum width allowed 8 5 inches is the US factory default setting You can increase the width in 0 01 inch increments e 216 mm is the international factory default setting You can increase the width in 1 mm increments Understanding the printer menus 199 Use To Portrait Height Set the portrait height 3 14 17 inches Notes 76 360 mm Ifthe height exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum height allowed 14 inches is the US factory default setting You can increase the height in 0 01 inch increments e 356mm is th
84. to dispose of These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions energy savings and natural resource savings Lexmark cartons are 10096 recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area When you return a cartridge to Lexmark you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in Lexmark will recycle the box Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label You can also do the following 1 Goto www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country or region Saving money and the environment 247 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Maintaining the printer 248 Maintaining the printer Warning Potential Damage Failure to maintain optimum printer performance or to replace parts and su
85. tray or feeder Tray Renumber Restore Defaults Yes No Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings 242 Understanding the printer menus HTML menu Use To Font Name Joanna MT Set the default font for HTML documents Albertus MT Letter Gothic Note The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not Antique Olive Lubalin Graph specify a font Apple Chancery Marigold Arial MT Monalisa Recut Avant Garde Monaco Bodoni New CenturySbk Bookman New York Chicago Optima Clarendon Oxford Cooper Black Palatino Copperplate StempelGaramond Coronet Taffy Courier Times Eurostile TimesNewRoman Garamond Univers Geneva Zapf Chancery Gill Sans NewSansMTCS Goudy NewSansMTCT Helvetica New SansMTJA Hoefler Text NewSansMTKO Intl CG Times Intl Courier Intl Univers L Use To Font Size Set the default font size for HTML documents 1 255 pt Notes 12 ptis the factory default setting Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scale Scale the default font for HTML documents 1 40076 Notes 10096is the factory default setting Scaling can be increased in 196 increments Orientation Set the page orientation for HTML documents Portrait Landscape Note Portrait is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 243 a Use To Margin Size Set the page margin for HTML documents 8 255 mm Notes 19 mm is the factory default setting
86. wireless network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router Note On is the factory default setting View Hostname Set the host name View Address Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web View Router Address Server Enable DHCPv6 On Off Enable DHCPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Wireless menu 206 Note This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless network adapter To access the menu navigate to Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless Use Wi Fi Protected Setup Start Push Button Method Start PIN Method Establish a wireless network and enable network security Notes Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network when buttons on both the printer and the access point wireless router are pressed within a given period of time Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the access point Enable Disable WPS Auto detection Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with 802 11b g n Enable WPS uses Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method Disable Note Disable is the factory default setting Networ
87. wireless network using the Wi Fi Protected Setup seeeeseeeeeenne 39 Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Servel ccsscccccessssseeeeesssseaeeees 40 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port eeeeeeeeeeene 41 Setting UpSerial Printing E 42 Verifying printer setup coe o p teret eter e YRx SEX Ee UE REA RAE EET RE YER SENE ED e RUNE CEPR e ERR EXE FRE Rea ERE NEE 43 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 45 Learning about the prihter 01 eret the exei ees nba reo equa ae ERE dx Plat ete ca Ex REIS NUR Tuc x ree traen A ede pn 45 Printer configura tiM S t EDIDIT DL ITE 45 Using the printer control panel iti ter Et veta ex raa io LOL YR M Gea ec lad dee a End RELY i iri EaR 47 Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights eese 48 Contents 3 Loading paper and specialty MeCia cesccccceessneceeceseseeceseeeceeceenececesesaeeceesenaaeecesseneaeeeeeseueeeeeeseneaaes 48 Setting the paper size and type tein obediant a eaea aa aaia 48 Configuring Universal paper settings nennen nennen nennen ener nnne nne nenn nennen e nenas esee nnn nnns nnn 48 Loading the 250 or 550 sheet tray ccccsssscccscsssssececesssesseceecessasseceeseesseescseseseeesecessseeeeesessasece
88. you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low low very low or reach their end of life by setting the selectable alerts Notes Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge imaging unit and maintenance kit All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low low and very low supply conditions Not all selectable alerts can be set for the end of life supply condition E mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Using MS812de 169 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Print Settings Supply Notifications 3 From the drop down menu for each supply select one of the following notification options
89. 0 U understanding the home screen 89 135 uneven print density 335 Unformatted flash detected 53 301 363 Universal Paper Size setting 95 Universal paper size setting 48 142 Universal Setup menu 198 unlinking trays 67 113 114 161 162 Unsupported option in slot x 55 301 Unsupported USB hub please remove 287 updating options in printer driver 36 USB port 33 printer control panel 47 88 134 USB port x disabled 56 302 USB parallel interface card troubleshooting 316 User s Guide using 9 using Forms and Favorites 114 162 using Hibernate Mode 126 using Hibernate mode 80 173 using Quiet mode 172 using recycled paper 245 using the printer control panel 47 88 134 using the touch screen buttons 90 136 Utilities menu 237 V verify print jobs 71 117 165 printing from a Macintosh computer 72 118 166 printing from Windows 72 118 166 verifying printer setup 43 vertical voids appear 335 virtual display checking using Embedded Web Server 74 120 168 voids appear 335 volatile memory 82 128 175 erasing 83 128 176 volatility statement of 82 128 175 W wiping the printer hard disk 84 129 177 Index Wireless menu 206 wireless network configuration information 38 wireless network setup using the Embedded Web Serve 40 X XPS menu 238 364
90. 100 sheet tray ced tier at ei e reae ete eec ed Een easy 149 Loading the multipurpose feeder eee eee empti LE OERE 156 Linking and unlinking trays sessseesessesee nai iaria nnn nennen aaa iaio ridera nennen asse snnt annes 161 lli na ATA EO E EL 162 Printing a COCUMENT nininini aiaia eed iid ee ra Ede AE aE aa reside e akaa iaaa aioa RE eR Edel 162 Printing froma flash drive eoe t e a e e edendi tds 164 Contents 5 Printing confidential and other held jobs ccesccccessceceesceeeseaeeeceseeeeeeceeaaeecesaaeceeeaeeseeaeeseaaeeseae eaeeseeaeeneeaes 165 Printing information pages etim enti eene tari Ten ettet eae ne ntu aene eene UR eri eiue atten ene estere EEEa 167 Canceling print JOD rene tdt re RERUM Rr e a easier eder ete ete ic ee 167 AME TRY FATA E vour Drite RR EE 168 Finding advanced networking and administrator information 168 Checking the virtual display iioc tede eec tet recte cade regio deae eR per renes 168 Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server esses 168 Modifying confidential print SettingS ccccccssscccccessssssccecessssuseseseseeeecesssssseeescesssseeeeesesuseaseeeesesesaeeesens 169 Copying printer settings to other printers ccccccccssccccccsssssccceeccesssececcsseseecescssseeeeeesssseseeeceseeacsueseseessnaaaes 169 Printing a menu settings page iiron iniii eene nennen e e N Enee EEE ENAA aSK s eese seen sees setas neni
91. 118 166 Confidential Print menu 215 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 286 configuration information wireless network 38 Index configurations printer 45 86 132 Configure MP menu 192 configuring multiple printers 76 122 169 supply notifications imaging unit 74 120 168 supply notifications maintenance kit 74 120 168 supply notifications toner cartridge 74 120 168 configuring port settings 41 configuring supply notifications 120 168 configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server 74 connecting to a wireless network using PBC Push Button Configuration method 39 using PIN Personal Identification Number method 39 using the Embedded Web Server 40 conservation settings brightness adjusting 80 126 173 conserving supplies 245 Eco Mode 77 123 171 Hibernate Mode 126 Hibernate mode 80 173 Quiet mode 78 124 172 Sleep mode 79 125 172 conserving supplies 245 contacting customer support 337 control panel printer indicator light 48 88 134 Sleep button light 48 88 134 controller board accessing 14 corrupted printer hard disk 286 creating custom name paper type 113 Custom Bin Names menu 198 Custom Names menu 198 custom paper type assigning 68 162 custom paper type name assigning 114 creating 67 161 Custom Type x assigning a paper type 68 changing name 161 creating custom name 113 Custom Type x name creating 67 Custom Types menu 197 customer support c
92. 3 1 2 3 b Resend the print job Did the job print and collate correctly Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Step 3 Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job Did the job print and collate correctly NS The problem is solved Contact customer support Troubleshooting Multiple language PDF files do not print Action Step 1 b Generate a new PDF file and then resend the print job Do the files print a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts Yes The problem is solved 308 Go to step 2 Step 2 a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat b Click File gt Print gt Advanced gt Print As Image gt OK gt OK Do the files print N The problem is solved Contact customer support Print job takes longer than expected A i Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 Change the environmental settings of the printer a From the printer control panel navigate to Settings gt General Settings b Select Eco Mode or Quiet Mode and then select Off Note Disabling Eco Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the consumption of energy or supplies or both Did the job print Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Reduce the number and size of fonts t
93. 31 a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the tray or feeder from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 Change the paper type From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper and weight to match menu to match the paper loaded in the tray the paper loaded in the tray Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved Step 5 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Contact customer support The problem is solved Streaked vertical lines appear on prints Leading edge
94. 6 standard Provide a flat sturdy and stable surface Keep the printer Clean dry and free of dust Away from stray staples and paper clips Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations Ambient temperature 15 6 C 32 2 C a Storage temperature 10 C 43 3 C Right side 305 mm 12 in Front 508 mm 20 in Left side 305 mm 12 in Rear 305 mm 12 in wu P _ Ww n e Top 115 mm 4 5 in Selecting a location for the printer a I l x l ct Right side 305 mm 12 in Front 508 mm 20 in Left side 305 mm 12 in Rear 305 mm 12 in uw Pl _ wl N N e Top 115 mm 4 5 in Right side E 305 mm 12 in Front 508 mm 20 in Left side 305 mm 12 in Rear 305 mm 12 in uw Pl _ wl N N e Top 115 mm 4 5 in A 12 Additional printer setup 13 Additional printer setup Installing internal options CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet be
95. Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer printing solid black pages Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Is the printer printing solid black pages Repeating defects appear on prints Troubleshooting Action Step 1 e 47 8 mm 1 88 in 96 8mm 3 81 in e 28 5 mm 1 12 in Is the distance between the defects equal to one of the listed measurements Check if the distance between the defects is equal to any of the following Yes Go to step 2 329 1 Check if the distance between the defects is equal to any of the following 94 25 mm 3 71 in e 95 2 mm 3 75 in 2 Take note of the distance and then contact customer support at http support le xmark com or your service representative Step 2 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do the repeating defects still appear X Contact customer support The problem is solved Shadow images appear on prints Leading edge N ABCD ABCD Trailing edge A Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Load paper with the Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray
96. From the list of installed applications click the name of the application you want to configure 4 Click Configure and then do one of the following Toexport a configuration to a file click Export and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file Notes When saving the configuration file you can type a unique file name or use the default name Using MS810de 95 Ifa JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved To import a configuration from a file click Import and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer Notes Before importing the configuration file you can choose to preview it first or load it directly Ifa timeout occurs and a blank screen appears then refresh the Web browser and then click Apply Loading paper and specialty media The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 261 and Storing paper on page 183 Setting the paper size and type From the home screen navigate to Bu gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select the paper size or type gt Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal paper size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer me
97. Hibernate then the printer follows the value of the Hibernate Timeout setting except when it is set to Disabled Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting Press Sleep Button Do nothing Sleep Hibernate Determine how the printer while in idle state reacts to a short press of the Sleep button Note Sleep is the factory default setting Press and Hold Sleep Button Do nothing Sleep Hibernate Determine how the printer while in idle state reacts when you press and hold the Sleep button Note Do nothing is the factory default setting Factory Defaults Do Not Restore Restore Now Restore the printer settings to the factory default settings Notes Do Not Restore is the factory default setting Do Not Restore keeps the user defined settings Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or in the printer hard disk are not affected Custom Home Message Off IP Address Hostname Contact Name Location Zero Configuration Name Custom Text 1 Select Custom Home Messages on the printer display Note This menu appears only in non touch screen printer models Understanding the printer menus 229 Export Configuration Package Export the printer configuration package to a flash drive Export Note The configuration package c
98. LEXMARK IMS810 Series User s Guide Important Click here before using this guide April 2012 Machine type s 4063 Model s 210 230 23E 410 430 630 63E www lexmark com Contents 2 Contents c r c Y SUIV REM EFI rade uto m dopes 9 Finding information about the Printer ccccccccccccceccecessesesnsesseeceececeecescesseseseeessaeseeseeeescssesseneesesssseenes 9 Selecting ad location for the gli e s Additional printer Setup oss exo bora x a Rep P unR Ya V eUP EVE VENE NR Y NE YR EUAI VE erp E En c crore R LO Installing internal OPtlONSs i ucuococe eon te etcetera ne puente aec tg davanbbes nee ane LH Sea ean gu ga eaae RD AGERE OR OR ne sess 13 Available interrial optioNs iti etit t rei i oret ius enr sri dp Geddes efe bark ee o Ren capi Re pea ts 13 Accessing the controller board sess innen nnn sen en nennen sess cussaeaeeseseseuaes 14 Installing aMOEMOry card etna ec recta E EORR ERR ia ERR a ge eL LAT IG Ma EAE R ND RE e Kan Mo 17 Installing an Internal Solutions POFt ccccscccecsssssececcsssessseeecessusseesessuseeescecusseeeeseceeeeesessesea caaeeeesesssauseeeeeeses 18 Installing an optional card ccccsscccccessseseceecesssececeesesusescseseececesessuseeecessesaeeceseeeueesesen ainara aieiaiei i aeaa 23 Installing a printer hard disk ice iier
99. MS812de Printing from a flash drive Supported flash drives and file types a Flash drive Lexar JumpDrive 2 0 Pro 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes SanDisk Cruzer Mini 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes Notes High speed USB flash drives must support the full speed standard Low speed USB devices are not supported USB flash drives must support the FAT File Allocation Tables system Devices formatted with NTFS New Technology File System or any other file system are not supported File type Documents pdf Xps html Images dcx gif JPEG or jpg bmp pcx TIFF or tif png Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted PDF file you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control panel You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes Aflash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted f you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive Using MS812de 165 f you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any wireless
100. Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Radio interference notice Warning This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Notices 352 Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not caus
101. On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Standard Network Setup OR Show and set the printer network settings Network x Setup Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless Reports network Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Reports menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following Network Ports Standard Network Standard Network Setup Reports Network Ports Network x Network x Setup Reports Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address Network Card menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following Network Ports Standard Network Standard Network Setup Network Card Network Ports Network x Network x Setup Network Card Use To View Card Status View the connection status of the wireless network adapter Connected Disconnected View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter Network Address View the network addresses UAA LAA Understanding the printer menus 204 Use To Job Timeout Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled 0 10 225 seconds Notes 90 seconds is the factory default setting Asetting value of 0 disables the timeout f avalue between 1 and 9 is selected then Invalid appears on the display and the value is
102. PDF file you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control panel You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes Aflash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted f you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive Using MS810de 117 f you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the printer or the flash drive in the area shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device Loss of data can occur 2 From the printer control panel touch the document you want to print 3 Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing and then touch Print Notes Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing f you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then touch Held Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer 1 From the home screen navigate to N Security Confidential Print
103. Pull out the tray Notes When loading folio legal or oficio size paper lift the tray slightly and then pull it out Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display Doing so may cause a jam Using MS812de 144 2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place Note Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS812de 145 3 Unlock the length guide and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Notes Lock the length guide for all paper sizes e Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS812de 146 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Two sided printing Two sided printing Using MS812de 147 Do not slide the paper into the tray Load paper as shown in the illustration f you are loading envelopes then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left side of the
104. Saving pap r and tonen esiaren tee e eee tie esie i a Busses cob ee deed ee cod 245 TorTel oen 246 Maintaining the printer eoe eoe yep eee er er oae EA PEN EP Y Rx eh Eo ra e av En en posunroPare aded eo Ordering supplies orien eet enne go ege rere Denke Toa ae ee a e tua duceuediaei ss ea ETE AN EE EEE SEE ERR VES ES 248 Storing supplies oe yi Ie ERE e Hee eds nr ERAN d e SED M ur eR EDRA SED r e ERR TREE RON ERERR Ed E0s 251 Replacing supplies oreet e pH n NEU 251 Cleaning the printer parts 2 2 ree erede toten ya eu teen A Ta Te n PRA RN Nee TQ da ee RR TNT ede dd 257 Moving the printer iicet ere teet e epe e Eh edet ted be i Ere PP trt ced Ma ede du tra ign 258 Contents 6 Clearing TAINS cvsccsenseweassnaveraesvunvscnvseanpurvadesnonecadevauiseadieueevadeserevetseveniernveuee OL PATIENCE 261 Understanding jam messages and locations csssssssssccceccecesssnsnceceeceececeesessesesseseasaeeeeeeeeeesseseseeees 263 x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 200 201 essere 265 x page jam open upper rear door 202 seseseseeeeeeeeeenennnnnnnn nnnm nnn 268 x page jam open upper and lower rear door 231 234 sss nnne 269 x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 sese 271 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 esee nnn 271 Ix lpage jam open tray x 24x iiie cotone a Lee ne
105. Understanding the printer menus 244 Menu item Description Printing Guide Provides information about loading paper and other specialty media Media Guide Provides a list of the paper sizes supported in trays and feeders Print Defects Guide Provides information about resolving print defects Menu Map Provides a list of the printer control panel menus and settings Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information Connection Guide Provides information about connecting the printer locally USB or to a network Moving Guide Provides instructions for safely moving the printer Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies J Saving money and the environment 245 Saving money and the environment Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packaging to reduce materials and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle By selecting certain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Saving paper and to
106. Wireless Wi Fi Protected Setup Start Push Button Method gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start Push Button Method 2 Follow the instructions on the printer display Using the Personal Identification Number PIN method 1 Depending on your printer model navigate to either of the following gt Settings gt OK gt Networks Ports gt OK gt Network x gt OK gt Network x Setup gt OK gt Wireless gt OK gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt OK gt Start PIN Method avs gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start PIN Method gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start PIN Method 2 Copy the eight digit WPS PIN 3 Open a Web browser and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field Notes The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 4 Access the WPS settings For more information see the documentation that came with your access point 5 Enter the eight digit PIN and then save the setting Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server Before you begin make sure that Your printer i
107. X 7 3 x 10 5 in M v v Oficio 216 x 340 mm 8 5 x 13 4 in v v v v Folio 216 x 330 mm vV vV vV vV 8 5 x 13 in Statement 140 x 216 mm J X 5 5 x 8 5 in v v t If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel then you may select common paper sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size Type menu If the paper size is not available then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing For more information contact customer support To support two sided duplex printing the Universal width must be between 105 mm 4 13 inches and 216 mm 8 5 inches the Universal length must be between 148 mm 5 83 inches and 356 mm 14 inches E Paper and specialty media guide 185 Paper size Dimensions Standard or Optional Multipurpose Duplex optional 250 or 2100 sheet tray feeder 550 sheet trays Universal 105 x 148 mm to 216 x356 mm 4 13 x 5 83 in to v x vV V 8 5x14in 70 x 127 mm to X X vV X 216 x 356 mm 2 76x5 to 8 5x14in 7 3 4 Envelope 98 x191 mm Monarch 3 9 x 7 5 in 9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm 3 9 x 8 9 in 10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm 4 1 x 9 5 in DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm 4 3 x 8 7 in C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm 6 38 x 9 01 in B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 in lt lt lt lt lt lt I x lt lt lt lt lt lt lt x Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm 3 9 x 6 4 i
108. a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe All Settings appears The printer will restart several times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings solutions jobs and passwords from the printer memory 4 Navigate to Back Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 84 Erasing printer hard disk memory Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe Disk appears and then select one of the following Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with rand
109. actory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type x is the factory default setting for all other trays f available a user defined name will appear instead of Custom Type x Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking MP Feeder Size A4 AS A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size Make sure to set the paper size value Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu NS Understanding the printer menus 191 Use To MP Feeder Type Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled From the Paper menu set Configure to Cassette for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu Notes Plain Paper is the factory default setting Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x Manual Paper Size Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded A4 Note Letter is the US factory
110. age and then finding the TCP IP section Note You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer 3 Install the printer driver on the computer a Insert the Software and Documentation CD and then double click the installer package for the printer b Follow the instructions on the computer screen C Select a destination and then click Continue d From the Easy Install screen click Install e Type the user password and then click OK All the necessary applications are installed on the computer f Click Close when installation is complete 4 Add the printer For IP printing a From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences Print amp Scan System Preferences Print amp Fax b Click C Click the IP tab d Type the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Notes Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10 5 a From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print amp Fax b Click and then navigate to AppleTalk select your printer Add Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network Notes Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly Make sure your access point wireless router is turned on and is working properly Additional printer
111. ams when it enters or exits the tray then it may not be properly installed Is the tray listed in the menu settings page Step 4 Go to step 5 Manually add the tray Check if the tray is available in the printer driver in the printer driver Note You may need to manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 36 Is the tray available in the printer driver Step 5 The problem is solved Contact customer Check if the tray is selected support From the application you are using select the tray If you are using Mac OS X version 9 then make sure the printer is set up in Chooser Does the tray operate properly Troubleshooting Cannot detect internal option Action Step 1 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Does the internal option operate correctly Yes The problem is solved 313 PES Go to step 2 Check if the option is available in the printer driver It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 36 Is the internal option available in the printer driver Step 2 Go to step 3 Connect the internal Check if the internal option is properly installe
112. and its corresponding printer status Sleep button light Printer status Off The printer is idle or in Ready state Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode Blinking amber The printer is waking from or entering Hibernate mode Blinking amber for 0 1 second then goes The printer is in Hibernate mode completely off for 1 9 seconds in pulsing pattern M 3 Loading paper and specialty media The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 261 and Storing paper on page 183 Setting the paper size and type 1 From the printer control panel navigate to E gt Settings gt OK gt Paper Menu gt OK gt Paper Size Type gt OK 2 Press the up or down arrow button to select the tray or feeder and then press OK 3 Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper size and then press 4 Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper type and then press OK to change the settings Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal paper size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 49 Notes The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm 2 76 x 5 inches for one sided printing and 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 inches for two sided duplex printing The largest supp
113. and texture can significantly affect print quality From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the card stock loaded in the tray Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed problems Tips on using envelopes From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the envelopes loaded in the tray Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers For best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib paper or 25 cotton Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Haveaninterlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Paper and
114. annot be exported unless a flash drive is attached to the printer Flash Drive Menu Print Settings menu Use To Copies Specify a default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Paper Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting MP Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Collate Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies 1 1 1 2 2 2 Note 1 1 1 2 2 2 is the factory default setting 1 2 3 1 2 3 Sides Duplex Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page 1 sided Note 1 sided is the factory default setting 2 sided Staple Specify whether prints are stapled Off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting On allows the printer to staple print jobs This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Hole Punch Specify whether prints have holes for binding Off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting This menu appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Hole Punch Mode Specify the number of holes to be made on the prints 2 holes Notes 3 holes 4 holes 3 holes is the factory default setting This menu appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed a Use Duplex Binding Long Edge Short Edge Understanding the printe
115. aps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams 6 For custom or universal size paper adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack 7 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS812de 161 Linking and unlinking trays Linking and unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Paper Menu 3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking Tolink trays make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray Tounlink trays make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray 4 Click Submit Note You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel For more information see Setting the paper size and type
116. are and any hardware options are installed it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 36 Installing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 14 2 Unpack the printer hard disk Additional printer setup 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board cage EIL 1AAANNN Note If an optional ISP is currently installed then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP 25 Additional printer setup 26 To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP a Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket and then
117. asier for you to identify your printer on the network You can choose to use the default printer nickname or assign a name that is easier for you to remember You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can physically connect to the network Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a damaged cable Installing the printer on an Ethernet network For Windows users 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually a Click o or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type D Nsetup exe where Dis the letter of the CD or DVD drive C Press Enter or click OK 2 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen 3 Select Ethernet connection and then click Continue 4 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so 5 Select the printer from the list and then click Continue Note If the configured printer does not appear in the list then click Modify Search 6 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Additional printer setup 38 For Macintosh users 1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer 2 Obtain the printer IP address either From the printer control panel From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings p
118. ating the home screen applications esses enne en ner en nnns ener 92 Exporting and importing a configuration sessssssessssseeseeeeeeee eene nennen nennen ns en nnn nene nenne nennen nnne 94 Loading paper and specialty media esses eene eene nnne nennen neni nn snas s ener eene 95 Setting the paper size and type s e eee eere elisttemtese deett aai aeaa aa aa needs 95 Configuring Universal paper settings eere reden cere t e HE Aae aia et ege eodeni eda 95 loading the 250 or D5O sheettray ces e ee eret redierit de aa E E oh knees Ee A ee 95 Loading the 2100 sheet tray teca tete ae et t ide ee ad 101 Contents 4 Loading the multipurpose feeder ce eececeecceecesceeceseeeeceaeeceeeeceseaeeceaaeecseaaeeceaaaeceseaeessaeaeeeeaaeecseeeaeeseuaeseeeaes 108 Lirnking and unlinkilig trays ect eet ise tr e eit ne eee recen in ena e Un Let gue ete eee ene ova eee a tees 113 lai 114 Printirig a docurment eene RES AID m a Pee 114 Printirig from a flash drive terea t etre dedesassecues tastie i otn te tfi ers 116 Printing confidential and other held jobs ccsccceccesssssscceceeessssesecesseeeecesssaseeescesssseeeeesssesaaees nns 117 Printing information pages cinsinin iieii petes o rase iare ded aene cda e dai e eaa Pared te d eaa n eddie Dea 119 Canceling a printjoD AEAEE E tuit nte adiectis n itte 119 Managing your printer se eise et eee eene ree eo oe PT
119. avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn off the printer and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer f two or more optional finishers are installed then remove the finishers individually from the printer Notes Make sure to remove the topmost finisher first Toremove the finisher hold the finisher on both sides and then lift the latches to unlock the finisher If the printer does not have a caster base then remove the optional trays Note Slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until it clicks into place Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from t
120. ay cause damage 3 Align the notch 1 on the memory card with the ridge 2 on the connector Additional printer setup 18 4 Push the memory card straight into the connector and then push the card toward the controller board wall until it clicks into place 5 Reattach the controller board shield and then the controller board access cover Installing an Internal Solutions Port The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 14 2 If an optional printer hard disk is installed then remove the printer hard disk first For more information see Removing a printer hard disk on page 29 Additional printer setup 3 Unpack the ISP kit
121. ays be at the bottom of a configuration A maximum of four optional trays may be configured with the printer The optional 250 and 550 sheet trays may be installed in any order Using the printer control panel 1 7 Use the To Display View the status of the printer Set up and operate the printer Home button Go to the home screen Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode Press and release the Sleep button Touch the screen or press any hard button Open a tray cover or door Send a print job from the computer Perform a power on reset with the main power switch Attach a device to a USB port Keypad Enter numbers letters or symbols on the printer Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity Indicator light Check the status of the printer NIOO Ij amp USB port Connect a USB Bluetooth adapter or a flash drive to the printer Note Only the front USB port supports flash drives Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights The colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition Using MS812de 135 Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status Indicator light Printer status Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode Blinking green The pr
122. b Do vertical voids appear on prints M Contact customer support The problem is solved Solving home screen applications problems This troubleshooting step applies only to touch screen printer models An application error has occurred Action Step 1 Check the system log for relevant details a Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer home screen Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 b Click Settings Apps Apps Management System tab Log c From the Filter menu select an application status d From the Application menu select an application and then click Submit Does an error message appear in the log Yes Go to step 2 Contact customer support Step 2 Resolve the error The problem is solved Is the application working now bs Contact customer support Troubleshooting Embedded Web Server does not open 337 Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers Note Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server Are the Web proxy servers disabled Actio
123. ble side of the transparencies Be careful not to scratch them Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them Straighten the edges on a level surface Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 65 5 Load the paper or specialty media Note Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Without an optional staple finisher One sided printing One sided printing Two sided duplex printing Two sided duplex printing Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 66 Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams 6 For custom or universal size paper adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack 7 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match
124. cal outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray or more than one input option If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order Caster base 2100 sheet tray or spacer Optional 550 or 250 sheet tray Printer For more information on installing a caster base optional 250 or 550 sheet tray spacer or 2100 sheet tray see the setup sheet that came with the option Installing optional trays A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted
125. checking status 77 123 171 checking from printer control panel 123 checking on the printer control panel 170 checking using the Embedded Web Server 77 123 171 conserving 245 storing 251 using genuine Lexmark 248 using recycled paper 245 supplies ordering imaging unit 249 maintenance kit 250 roller kit 250 staple cartridges 250 toner cartridges 248 Supply needed to complete job 300 supply notifications configuring 74 120 168 supported flash drives 70 116 164 supported paper sizes 184 supported paper types 183 supported paper weights 183 T TCP IP menu 204 tips card stock 179 labels paper 180 on using envelopes 179 transparencies 180 Index tips on using envelopes 179 toner cartridge replacing 251 toner cartridges ordering 248 recycling 246 toner darkness adjusting 69 115 163 Too many bins attached 58 300 Too many disks installed 58 301 Too many flash options installed 58 301 Too many trays attached 58 301 touch screen buttons using 90 136 transparencies loading 62 108 156 tips 180 trays linking 67 113 114 161 162 unlinking 67 113 114 161 162 troubleshooting an application error has occurred 336 cannot open Embedded Web Server 337 checking an unresponsive printer 302 contacting customer support 337 solving basic printer problems 302 troubleshooting display printer display is blank 304 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 317 troubleshooting pr
126. d in the controller board option to the controller a Turn off the printer Boat b Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet c Make surethe internal option is installed in the appropriate connector in the controller board d Turn the printer back on Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board Step 3 Go to step 4 Reinstall the internal Print a menu settings page and then check to see if the internal option is option listed in the Installed Options list Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page Step 4 Go to step 5 Manually add the internal option in the printer driver Step 5 a Check if the internal option is selected Note From the application you are using select the internal option For Mac OS X version 9 users make sure the printer is set up in Chooser b Resend the print job Does the internal option operate correctly M The problem is solved Contact customer support Troubleshooting Internal print server does not operate correctly Action Step 1 Reinstall the internal print server a Remove and then install the internal print server For more information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 18 b Printa menu settings page and then check if the internal print server is listed in the Installed Options list Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Options list Yes Go to step 2 314 Check if
127. ddress in the Web browser address field Gray Correction Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting Off Brightness Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it You can conserve toner 6 to 6 by lightening the output Note 0 is the factory default setting Contrast Adjust the contrast of printed objects 0 5 Note 0 is the factory default setting Job Accounting menu Note This menu item appears only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Make sure the printer hard disk is not read write or write protected Use To Job Accounting Log Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives off Note Off is the factory default setting On Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive Accounting Log Frequency Determine and set how often a log file is created Weekly Note Monthly is the factory default setting Monthly Log Action at End of Frequency Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires None Note None is the factory default setting E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Disk Near Full Level Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes Disk Near Full off Action 1 99 Note 5 is the factory default se
128. default setting A4 is the international factory A5 default setting A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu NS Understanding the printer menus Use Manual Paper Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x 192 ooo Specify the paper type being manually loaded Notes Plain Paper is the factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Manual for Manual Paper Type to appear as a menu Manual Envelope Size 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Specify the envelope size being manually loaded Note 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting DL Envelope is the international factory default setting Manual Envelope Type Envelope Rough Envelope Custom Type x Specify the envelope type being manually loaded Note Envelope is the factory default setting Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu NS Configure MP menu Use Configure MP Cassette Manual First z Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Notes Cassette is the factory default setting Cassette configures the multipurpose
129. density uneven Contact customer support The problem is solved Vertical voids appear on prints Leading edge e n k By Trailing edge Step 1 a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Action Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved Step 2 a From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Go to step 3 The problem is solved Step 3 Check if you are using a recommended type of paper a Loadthe specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints is Go to step 4 The problem is solved Troubleshooting a Action Step 4 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Yes Go to step 5 336 EN The problem is solved Step 5 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print jo
130. disent Linn tite diea nae a E a d dia aaa anao a Ra Ranae ch 24 Removing a printer hard disk ii petet orbi eimi adipe pua utat dida teret eae d 29 Installing hardware ODEtiOns 22 eror co nuoc etta nter a a aa nna sabecalnhed eda Fa danni eap an DA DRE Fera an dd 31 o Tro gei Ee Em 31 stalling optional trays iic tii orca ena dra apad n cta va eoa sae TO rp pado Es rgo cd da ga edges cadedyasddebedsaa cosagacdcnanadsdgennecadearee 31 PeTochbraehzkeest m O 33 Setting up the printer SOFtWALE ccccessssecceceeecesessssnsseeceeeesseseuseceeeeeecescesesessueseeeseseessussesueusagasaseseeeess 35 Installing the printer software eese aa nennen nasse raai a eni senes nasse enean nnne 35 Updating available options in the printer driver ccceecceceesceeceeceeeseaeeceeeaeeeceaeeeeeaeeeaaeesesaaeseeeaeeseeeeaeeneeaeees 36 Networking peste eso ces oe te cena nece Toten enel a a qune aD Ee esae ewe RR E Maya bns eO Le oon qe Ys Qaa EE 37 Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network cccccsccesssssseeceesesesseeeccesssseseeesscssseeseeeessessaaeeeeees 37 Installing the printer on an Ethernet network ccccccssssscccccssssseeeeccssnseseccsssesseeeecessssaeeeeescsssueeeessesesnaeeesesees 37 Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless NEtWOFK ccccccesssscceeceessseeceeesseseeeecesensseeecescessseseeesseeseseeesesses 38 Connecting the printer to a
131. djusting 126 173 Eco Mode 77 123 171 Hibernate Mode 126 Hibernate mode 80 173 printer display brightness adjusting 80 Quiet mode 78 124 172 Sleep mode 79 125 172 erasing hard disk memory 84 129 erasing non volatile memory 83 129 176 erasing printer hard disk memory 177 erasing volatile memory 83 128 176 Error reading USB drive Remove USB 287 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 287 Ethernet network preparing to set up for Ethernet printing 37 Ethernet network setup using Macintosh 37 using Windows 37 Ethernet networking Macintosh 37 Windows 37 Ethernet port 33 Ethernet setup preparing for an 37 Index exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 94 141 exterior of the printer cleaning 257 F factory defaults restoring 127 174 factory defaults restoring 81 FCC notices 346 347 finding more information about the printer 9 finisher finishing features 185 supported paper sizes 185 finisher features 185 Finishing menu 233 firmware card 13 flash drive printing from 70 116 164 flash drives supported file types 70 116 164 font sample list printing 73 119 167 Forms and Favorites setting up 93 140 Fuser kit early wear warning 81 xx 287 Fuser kit near end of life 81 xx 287 G General Settings menu 219 green settings Eco Mode 77 123 171 Hibernate Mode 126 Hibernate mode 80 173 Quiet mode 78 124 172 H held jobs 71 117 165 printing from a Macintosh compu
132. dn One sided printing One sided printing Two sided printing Two sided printing 60 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator i Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams 5 Insert the tray Note Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray 61 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 62 6 From the printer control panel set the size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Loading the multipurpose feeder 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door Note Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 63 2 Pull the multipurpose feeder extender Note Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open 3 Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Note Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 64 4 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Note Avoid touching the printa
133. e advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide at http support lexmark com Checking the virtual display 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low low very low or reach their end of life by setting the selectable alerts Using MS810de 121 Notes Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge imaging unit and maintenance kit All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low low and very low supply conditions Not all selectable alerts can be set for the end of life supply condition E mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP add
134. e best print quality Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib paper grain long paper is recommended Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Selecting paper Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality Always use new undamaged paper Before loading paper know the recommended printable side of the paper This information is usually
135. e guides Using MS810de 98 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not One sided printing One sided printing Using MS810de Two sided printing Two sided printing Do not slide the paper into the tray Load paper as shown in the illustration 99 f you are loading envelopes then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left side of the tray Using MS810de 100 Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams 6 For custom or universal size paper adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack and then lock the length guide 7 Insert the tray 8 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS810de 101 Loading the 2100 sheet tray CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other tray
136. e hole punch box into the finisher and then select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Insert staple cartridge Try one or more of the following Insert a staple cartridge For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Select Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple finisher For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Insert Tray x Try one or more of the following Insert the specified tray into the printer Cancel the print job Reset the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel Install bin x Try one or more of the following nstall the specified bin 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Install the specified bin 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Reset active bin Install Tray x Try one or more of the following nstall the specified tray 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Install the specified tray 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 290 Reset the active bin Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment opera
137. e interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Industry Canada Canada Cet appareil est conforme a la norme RSS 210 d Industry Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toute interf rence recue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Cet appareil a t concu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des
138. e international factory default setting You can increase the height in 1 mm increments Feed Direction Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction Short Edge Notes Long Edge Short Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray Bin Setup menu Use To Output Bin Specify the default bin Standard Bin Notes Bin x f multiple bins are assigned the same name then the name appears only once in the menu Standard Bin is the factory default setting Configure Bins Specify configuration options for bins Mailbox Notes Link Mail Overflow Mailbox is the factory default setting This setting 3 treats each bin as a separate mailbox Link Optional j Type Assignment Link configures all available bins as one large bin Mail Overflow configures each bin as a separate mailbox Link Optional links all available bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed Type Assignment assigns each paper type to a bin or linked bin set Bins assigned the same name are automatically linked unless Link Optional is selected Understanding the printer menus a Use Overflow Bin Standard Bin Bin x 200 Specify an alternative bin when a designated bin is full Notes Standard Bin is the
139. e is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Understanding the printer menus Use Separator Source Tray x Manual Feeder 234 C Specify the paper source for separator sheets Notes Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Print multiple page images on one side of a paper Notes e Off is the factory default setting The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side Paper Saver Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using Paper Saver Notes Horizontal is the factory default setting Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and landscape Paper Sav
140. e name paper orientation 292 Load manual feeder with paper size paper orientation 292 Load manual feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation 293 Load staples 291 loading 2100 sheet tray 55 101 149 card stock 62 108 156 envelopes 62 108 156 letterhead in 2100 sheet tray 55 101 149 letterhead in multipurpose feeder 62 108 156 letterhead in trays 49 95 143 multipurpose feeder 62 108 156 optional 250 sheet tray 49 95 143 optional 550 sheet tray 49 95 143 standard 250 sheet tray 49 standard 550 sheet tray 49 95 standard tray 143 transparencies 62 108 156 lock security 82 127 175 M maintenance kit ordering 250 Maintenance kit low 80 xy 293 Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy 293 Maintenance kit very low 80 xy 293 memory types installed on printer 82 128 175 memory card 13 installing 17 Memory full 38 293 menu settings loading on multiple printers 76 122 169 menu settings page printing 76 122 170 menus Active NIC 201 AppleTalk 206 Bin Setup 199 Confidential Print 215 Configure MP 192 Custom Bin Names 198 Custom Names 198 Custom Types 197 Default Source 189 Disk Wiping 216 Edit Security Setups 214 Finishing 233 General Settings 219 Help 243 HTML 242 Image 243 IPv6 205 Job Accounting 236 list of 188 Miscellaneous 215 Network x 201 Network Card 203 Network Reports 203 Paper Loading 196 Paper Size Type 189 Paper Texture 193 Paper Weight 194 Parallel x
141. e relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Rough Cotton Texture Specify the relative texture of the rough or cotton paper loaded in a specific tray Rough Note Rough is the factory default setting Custom x Texture Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough M T Paper Weight menu Plain Weight Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Understanding the printer menus 195 Use To Card Stock Weight Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Transparency Weight Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Recycled Weight Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Labels Weight Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Vinyl Labels Weight Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Bond Weight Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded L
142. e the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Paper Menu 3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking To link trays make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray Tounlink trays make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray 4 Click Submit Note You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel For more information see Setting the paper size and type on page 95 Warning Potential Damage Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured Creating a custom name for a paper type Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings
143. earing jams 268 10 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch P or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK x page jam open upper rear door 202 CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 1 Pull down the rear door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the rear door Clearing jams 269 4 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch P or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt n x page jam open upper and lower rear door 231 234 CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 1 Pull down the rear door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the rear door Clearing jams 270 4 Push the back of the standard tray 5 Press down the rear duplex flap then firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull the paper out Note
144. eb Server You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low low very low or reach their end of life by setting the selectable alerts Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 75 Notes Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge imaging unit and maintenance kit All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low low and very low supply conditions Not all selectable alerts can be set for the end of life supply condition E mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Print Settings Supply Notifications 3 From the drop down menu for each supply select one of the following notification options Notification Description Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs E mail Only The printer generates an e mail when the supply condition is reached The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page Warning The printer displays t
145. ect the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Adjusting toner darkness Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the setting and then click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to A gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 2 Adjust the setting and then touch ZS Using MS810de Printing from a flash drive Supported flash drives and file types a Flash drive Lexar JumpDrive 2 0 Pro 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes SanDisk Cruzer Mini 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes Notes Hi speed USB flash drives must support the full speed standard Low speed USB devices are not supported USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table FAT system Devices formatted with New Technology File System NTFS or any other file system are not supported File type Documents pdf Xps html Images dcx gif JPEG or jpg bmp pcx TIFF or tif png Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted
146. ect until you access the menu again choose another value and save it From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Reports gt OK gt Menu Settings Page gt OK Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 77 Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt E3 gt Reports gt OK gt Network Setup Page gt OK 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and then confirm that the status is Connected If the status is Not Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult your system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Checking the status of parts and supplies A message appears on the printer display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Notes Each gauge displays the estimated life left for the supply or part All page life estimates for supplies assume printing on a single side of letter or A4 size plain paper Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel From the printer control panel navigate to gt Status Supplies gt OK View Supplies gt OK Checking the status of par
147. ed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f your are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Sleep Button Settings 3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop down menu select Hibernate 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Settings gt OK gt General Settings gt OK 2 Press the arrow buttons until Press Sleep Buttonor Press and Hold Sleep Button appears and then press ok 3 Press the arrow buttons until Hibernate appears and then press Notes When Press Sleep Button is set to Hibernate a short press of the Sleep button sets the printer to Hibernate mode When Press and Hold Sleep Button is set to Hibernate a long press of the Sleep button sets the printer to Hibernate mode Adjusting the brightness of the printer display To save energy or if you have trouble reading the display adjust its brightness settings Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n
148. ed States Canada 2 European Economic Area EEA Switzerland 3 Asia Pacific Australia New Zealand 4 Latin America 5 Africa Middle East rest of Europe 9 Invalid J Notes The x and y values are the xy of the error code shown on the printer control panel Thexand y values must match for printing to continue Replace imaging unit O estimated pages remain 84 xy Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement imaging unit then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace maintenance kit O estimated pages remain 80 xy Contact customer support at http support lexmark com or your service representative and then report the message The printer is scheduled for maintenance Replace missing cartridge 31 xy Install the missing toner cartridge to clear the message For more information see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Replace missing imaging unit 31 xy Install the missing imaging unitto clear the message For more information see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy Remove the toner cartridge and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing For more information
149. edded solutions Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard disk is designed for device specific functionality This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs as well as form data and font data M A Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances The printer is being decommissioned The printer hard disk is being replaced The printer is being moved to a different department or location The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization Using MS812de 176 The printer is being removed from your premises for service The printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a printer hard disk Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises Degaussing Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note Most data can be erased electronically but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard dis
150. eder 3 Click Print Adjusting toner darkness Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the IP address of the printer in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Print Settings Quality Menu Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the toner darkness and then click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Print Settings gt OK gt Quality Menu gt OK gt Toner Darkness 2 Adjust the toner darkness and then press ok Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn Printing from a flash drive Supported flash drives and file types a Flash drive Lexar JumpDrive 2 0 Pro 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes SanDisk Cruzer Mini 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes Notes Hi speed USB flash drives must support the full speed standard Low speed USB devices are not supported USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table FAT system Devices formatted with New Technology File System NTFS or any other file system are not supported File type Documents pdf Xps html Images dcx gif JPEG or jpg bmp pcx TIFF or tif pn
151. eed eae i east 343 WACO AERA TERI EAE A E AAA A Lis Safety information 7 Safety information Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY This product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to
152. eived On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto Auto is the factory default setting Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Parallel Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Set the size of the parallel input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menu
153. en a door or cover Send a print job from the computer Perform a power on reset with the main power switch Attach a device to the USB port on the printer 4 Keypad Enter numbers letters or symbols 5 Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity 6 Indicator light Check the status of the printer 7 USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer i Note Only the front USB port supports flash drives J Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights 88 The colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition Using MS810de 89 Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status Indicator light Printer status Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red The printer requires user intervention J Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status Sleep button light Printer status off The printer is idle or in Ready state Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode Blinking amber The printer is waking from or entering Hibernate mode Blinking amber for 0 1 second then goes The printer is in Hibernate mode completely off for 1 9 seconds in pulsing pattern is Understanding the home screen When the pr
154. en select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Paper Menu gt OK gt Custom Types 2 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 3 Press ok Printing Printing a document Printing a document 1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded 2 Sendthe print job For Windows users a With a document open click File Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust the settings if necessary d Click OK Print Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 69 For Macintosh users a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog if necessary 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded 3 Click OK b Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog if necessary 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings if necessary Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded or select the appropriate tray or fe
155. ender them unreadable Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note Most data can be erased electronically but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply turn off the printer Using MS810de 129 Erasing non volatile memory Erase individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions by following these steps 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 on the keypad while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display instead of the standard home screen icons 3 Touch Wipe All Settings The printer will restart several times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings solutions jobs and passwords from the printer memory 4 Touch Back Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Erasing printer hard disk memory Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Configuring Disk Wiping in the prin
156. entation This setting affects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the same menu is not set to Off Understanding the printer menus 231 a Use To Separator Sheets Specify if blank separator sheets are inserted off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Notes Offisthe factory default setting Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing on transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document for notes Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for separator sheets Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Manual Feeder Blank Pages Specify if blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print S A Print Settings Setup menu Use To Printer Language Set the default printer language PCL Emulation Notes PS Emulation PCL Emulation is the factory default setting PostScript emulation uses a PostScript interpreter for processing print jobs PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs Setting a printer language de
157. enu settings page on page 170 for touch screen printer models Network setup page Use this page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Note Make sure your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network Additional printer setup 44 For more information see the following Printing a network setup page on page 77 for non touch screen printer models Printing a network setup page on page 122 or Printing a network setup page on page 170 for touch screen printer models Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 45 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn Learning about the printer Printer configurations Basic model 1 Standard bin 2 Printer control panel 3 Multipurpose feeder i 4 Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 Fully configured model CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray or more than one input option If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional finishers a
158. eps every 10 seconds Timeouts Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer Standby Mode enters a lower power state Disabled Notes 1 240 Standby Mode appears only in touch screen printer models 15 is the factory default setting Timeouts Set the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before Sleep Mode it goes into a reduced power state Disabled Notes 1 120 30 is the factory default setting Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off Lower settings conserve more energy but may require longer warm up times Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Understanding the printer menus 226 Use To Timeouts Set the printer to operate at a low power state Hibernate Timeout Notes Disabled 1 hour When the Hibernate Timeout timer expires the printer uses Ethernet connection to check the value of Hibernate 2 hours SRM Timeout on Connection 3 hours i 6h f Hibernate Timeout on Connection is set to Do Not Pod Hibernate then the printer never automatically hibernates 1 da 2d i f Hibernate Timeout on Connection is set to Hibernate ays then the printer follows the Hibernate Timeout value except 3 days when it is set to Disabled 1 week Disabled is the factory default setting except for European 2 weeks Union co
159. er see the instruction sheet that came with the part Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy Try one or more of the following Check if the imaging unit is missing If missing install the imaging unit For information on installing the imaging unit see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide fthe imaging unit is installed then remove the unresponsive imaging unit and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinstalling the supply then the imaging unit is defective Replace the imaging unit Remove defective disk 61 Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk Troubleshooting 297 Remove packaging material area name 1 Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location 2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Remove paper from all bins Bins have reached their capacity Remove paper from all bins to clear the message and continue printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then select Continue on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Remove paper from bin x Remove paper from the specified bin The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then select Continue on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models
160. er Border Print a border when using Paper Saver None Note None is the factory default setting Solid Staple Job Specify whether printed output is stapled off Notes On e Offis the factory default setting This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Run Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly Note This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Hole Punch On Off Specify whether holes will be created on printed outputs for the purpose of collecting the sheets in a binder or folder Notes Offis the factory default setting This menu appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Understanding the printer menus 235 Use To Hole Punch Mode Specify the number of holes to be created on printed outputs for the purpose of 2 holes collecting the sheets in a binder or folder 3 holes Notes 4 holes 3 holes is the US factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting This menu appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Offset Pages Offset pages at certain instances None Notes Between Copies Between Jobs None is the factory default setting Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off then each set of printed pages are offset suc
161. er are connected to the same network 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Device Status More Details Saving energy Using Eco Mode 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode 3 Select a setting Using MS810de 124 Use To Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode Notes Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory default settings Off supports the performance specifications of the printer Energy Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle Notes Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity The printer display is turned off when the print
162. er examples Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European testing Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib Multiple part forms or documents For more information about Lexmark visit www lexmark com General sustainability related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 percent Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 24 C 65 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent Store paper in cartons on a pallet or shelf rather than
163. er is in Sleep mode Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes Plain Paper Enable the automatic two sided duplex printing feature 4 Click Submit Reducing printer noise Enable Quiet mode to reduce printer noise 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Quiet Mode 3 Select a setting Using MS810de 125 Use To On Reduce printer noise Notes Print jobs process at a reduced speed Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There is a short delay before the first page is printed The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off The printer ignores the Advance Start command Off Use factory default settings Note This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer M P 4 Click Submit Adjusting Sleep mode To save energy decrease the number of minutes beforethe printer enters Sleep mode Select from 1to 120 The factory default se
164. er out of the printer 4 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard and then remove any loose staples Clearing jams 276 5 Press down the staple guard until it clicks into place 6 Press the staples against the metal bracket Note If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge then shake the cartridge downward to bring the staples near the metal bracket Clearing jams 277 7 Push the cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the cartridge holder clicks into place 8 Close the stapler door 9 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch 4 or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK Clearing jams 278 x page jam remove paper open finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451 1 Open the rear staple finisher door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the staple finisher door Clearing jams 279 4 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch P or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt x page jam remove paper open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 41y xx 1 Open the rear mailbox door eJ 2 Firmly grasp
165. er setup 34 The appropriate parallel cable with the parallel port 6 Use the B 1 Parallel port Connect the printer to a computer Note This can also be used in installing an optional Internal Solutions Port ISP 2 USB port Attach an optional wireless network adapter 3 Ethernet port Connect the printer to a network 4 USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer 5 Security slot Attach a lock that will secure the controller board L 6 Printer power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet J Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any wireless network adapter or the printer in the area shown while actively printing Loss of data or a malfunction can occur Organizing the cables Note This feature is available only if you purchase optional trays and a caster base After attaching the Ethernet cable and power cord neatly tuck the cables in the channels at the back of the printer Additional printer setup 35 Setting up the printer software Installing the printer software Note If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software then uninstall the current software first For Windows users 1 Close all open software programs 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually a Click e or click
166. ere oe eec eer ed o oe Leda oe eh eV e Der ees doe eder Pe Rea ge PEN ED 120 Finding advanced networking and administrator information 120 Checking the virtual display i aie er cent e tu e Ode ee ene n heen 120 Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server essen 120 Modifying confidential print SettingS cccccssseccccessesssececessessusesesesseececesssaseeescesssaeeeeesessueeeseeeesesesaeeeeees 121 Copying printer settings to other printers cccccccssccccccsssssseccecessssececcsseseecescssaeeesessesesseeeceseeaceueeeseessaeaaes 122 Printing a menu settings page eese nennen nennen nennen E aaa assesses sete setate sn sess ette ne tnra 122 Printing a network setup page e ee eee tea esee edv decet estesa uL a Aa Ea epe dte peste sud entra 122 Checking the status of parts and supplies sssesssessse seen eene nnne nennen enne nennen enne 123 SEIIBIASMISIAPONETIDOUEODD CC IDIOT 123 Restoring factory defaultsettings seeded iiic nias ce eren Sine L are Rabe gr eet a a a anana 127 Securing the printer 5 eee eee e or e n dte eed eue esee a AEE 127 Using MSSI2QG ic peri ietinecix or v Ex s eFLUEET Yi a3 Eee res eU Vra viae dr neve rib xvia vanes kOe Learning about the printer iier eee eee nene en nena nE aana tae oi dacsdeeseesesecu enstnsieielecdessbecsecostn seas 132 Printer CONfiSUrATIONS MR OUR LL m 132
167. es 3 Touch v Printing Printing a document Printing forms Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed Before you can use this application first set it up on the printer For more information see Setting up Forms and Favorites on page 93 1 From the printer home screen navigate to Forms and Favorites select the form from the list enter the number of copies adjust other settings 2 Depending on your printer model touch e v or Submit Using MS810de 115 Printing a document 1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded 2 Sendthe print job For Windows users a With a document open click File Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust the settings if necessary d Click OK Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded 3 Click OK b Customize the settings in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings if necessary Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded or sel
168. es d N q Trailing edge Troubleshooting Action 332 a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Yes ee Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 Do one or more of the From the printer control panel set the paper texture type and weight in following the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Specify the paper texture type and Do the paper texture type and weight match the paper in the tray weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper texture type and weight specified in the tray settings Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 4
169. es must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing Notices 348 The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Industry Canada Canada Cet appareil est conforme a la norme RSS 210 d Industry Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne do
170. es on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Two sided printing Two sided printing Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 53 Do not slide the paper into the tray Load paper as shown in the illustration f you are loading envelopes then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left side of the tray Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 54 Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams 6 For custom or universal size paper adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack and then lock the length guide 7 Insert the tray 8 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 55 Loading the 2100 sheet tray CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray 2 Adjust the width and length guides Loading A5 si
171. es the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Network Buffer Set the size of the network input buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Notes Auto is the factory default setting The value can be changed in 1KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing This menu only appears when a formatted disk is installed Notes Offis the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus 203 Use To Mac Binary PS Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs On Notes Off Auto Auto is the factory default setting Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol
172. ess on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Forms and Favorites Note Navigate through form categories or search for forms based on a form number name or description 3 Define the bookmarks and then customize the settings 4 Click Apply Using MS812de 141 Understanding Eco Settings Use To Manage energy consumption noise toner and paper usage settings to help reduce the environmental impact of your printer Setting up Remote Operator Panel This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network printer From your computer screen you can view the printer status release held print jobs create bookmarks and do other print related tasks you might normally perform on the network printer 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings Remote Operator Panel Settings 3 Select the Enabled check box and then customize the settings 4 Click Submit To use the application click Remote Operator Panel Launch VNC Applet Exporting and importing a conf
173. ets you easily manage energy consumption noise toner and paper usage settings to help reduce the environmental impact of your printer Setting up Remote Operator Panel This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network printer From your computer screen you can view the printer status release held print jobs create bookmarks and do other print related tasks you might normally do while standing at the network printer 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings Remote Operator Panel Settings 3 Select the Enabled check box and then customize the settings 4 Click Submit To use the application click Remote Operator Panel Launch VNC Applet Exporting and importing a configuration You can export configuration settings into a text file and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings Apps Apps Management 3
174. ew IP address All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address Notes fthe printer has a static IP address then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations ifthe computers are configured to use the network name instead of an IP address then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection then make sure the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly If the printer is not disconnected from the Ethernet network then the wireless configuration will complete but the wireless ISP will not be active To activate the wireless ISP disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network turn off the printer and then turn it back on Only one network connection is active at a time To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types turn off the printer connect the cable to switch to an Ethernet connection or disconnect the cable to switch to a wireless connection and then turn the printer back on For Windows users 1 u F amp F WwW N Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer control panel The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy
175. ew the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Paper Menu Custom Types 3 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to Paper Menu Custom Types 2 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 3 Touch Submit Printing Printing a document Printing forms Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed Before you can use this application first set it up on the printer For more information see Setting up Forms and Favorites on page 140 1 From the printer home screen navigate to Forms and Favorites select the form from the list enter the number of copies adjust other settings 2 Depending on your printer model touch e ZS or Submit Using MS812de 163 Printing a document 1 From the printer control panel set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded 2 Send the print job For Windows users a Wi
176. failed login attempts from the printer control Login failures panel before all users are locked out Failure time frame Notes Lockout time E i Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out Settings range from 1 to 10 3 attempts is the factory default setting Panel Login Timeout Remote Login Timeout Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the printer control panel before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 to 900 seconds 30 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 to 120 seconds 10 minutes is the factory default setting Minimum PIN Length Limit the digit length of the PIN 1 16 Note 4 is the factory default setting Confidential Print menu Use To Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered off Notes 2 10 This menu appears only when a formatted non defective p
177. fault does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language Job Waiting Determine if print jobs are removed from the print queue when On they require unavailable printer options or custom settings These Off print jobs are stored in a separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information or options or both are obtained the stored jobs print Notes Offisthe factory default setting This menu appears only if a non read only printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Understanding the printer menus Use Print Area Normal Fit to Page Whole Page 232 zo aa Set the logical and physical printable area Notes Normal is the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary Fit to Page fits the page content into the selected paper size Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary This setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter and has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Download Target RAM Flash Disk Set the storage location for downloads Notes RAM is the facto
178. feeder as the automatic paper source Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source Understanding the printer menus Substitute Size menu Substitute Size Off Statement A5 Letter A4 All Listed Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available Notes All Listed is the factory default setting All available substitutions are allowed Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change Paper appearing 193 Ne Paper Texture menu Plain Texture Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded in a specific tray Rough Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Card Stock Texture Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray Smooth Notes Normal Rough Normal is the factory default setting These options appear only if card stock is supported Transparency Texture Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Recycled Texture Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Labels Texture Specify the relative texture of the label
179. ff the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks Astatus bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the Enable Disable screen 5 Touch Back Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Using MS810de 131 Finding printer security information In high security environments you may need to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed For more information visit the Lexmark security Web page or see the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide 1 Goto http support lexmark com and then navigate to Support amp Downloads gt Tech Library gt Manuals amp Guides 2 Type Embedded Web Server in the keyword field and then click Filter 3 Click Embedded Web Server to launch the document Using MS812de 132 Using MS812de Learning about the printer Printer configurations Basic model 4 Standard bin Printer control panel Multipurpose feeder ml win amp Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 Fully configured model CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use
180. fic legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Modular component notice This product may contain the following modular component s Lexmark Regulatory Type LEX MO01 005 FCC ID IYLLEXMO1005 Industry Canada IC 2376A M01005 Multiple model information The following information applies to all MS810 MS811 and MS812 models except for the MS812de model Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
181. fore continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Available internal options Memory card DDR3 DIMM Flash memory Fonts Firmware cards Forms barcode PRESCRIBE IPDS Printcryption Printer hard disk Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP Parallel 1284 B interface MarkNet N8350 802 11 b g n wireless printer server MarkNet N8130 10 100 fiber interface RS 232 C serial interface Additional printer setup 14 Accessing the controller board Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer 1 Remove the controller board access cover 2 Using a screwdriver loosen the screws on the controller board shield Additional printer setup 15 3 Remove the controller board shield Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any c
182. from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated x Understanding the printer menus Use USB Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed 208 oO Set the size of the USB input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 K increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Mac Binary PS On Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes
183. g Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted PDF file you will be prompted to enter the file password from the printer control panel You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes Aflash drive icon appears on the printer control panel and in the held jobs icon when a flash drive is installed Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 71 f you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive f you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the printer or the flash drive in the area shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device Loss of data can occur 2 From the printer control panel select the document you want to print 3 Press the left or right arrow button to specify the number of copies for printing and then press OK Notes Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing f you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then access held jobs from the printer control panel to print files from
184. g File Transfer Yes Protocol No Note Yes is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus a Use Enable HTTP Server Yes No 205 oO Enable the built in Web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser Note Yes is the factory default setting WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address Enable DDNS View or change the current DDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable mDNS View or change the current mDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address Backup DNS Server Address Backup DNS Server Address 2 Backup DNS Server Address 3 View or change the backup DNS server addresses Enable HTTPS View or change the current HTTPS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No IPv6 menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt IPv6 Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt IPv6 Note This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers a Use Enable IPv6 On Off oe Enable IPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Auto Configuration On Off Specify whether or not the
185. ge of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances As part of your warranty service and or replacement Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest version Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and or unauthorized products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces to stop working Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted Notices 345 Before you present this product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warra
186. gen er sl et fra Undg at blive udsat for laserstralen GEVAAR Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser DANGER Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du d verrouillage des loquets Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser VAARA N kym t nt lasers teily on varottava kun v rikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki V lt lasers teelle altistumista GEFAHR Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre Laserstrahl meiden KINAYNO Ek uon a panc akt vo o ia laser kata tnv adaipeon twv kaoetwv kat tnv anaop ion THs HavSdAWOns Anope yete tnv x0gon otnv akcvofoA a laser VESZ LY Nem l that l zersug rz s fordulhat el a patronok elt vol t sakor s a z r szerkezet felbont sakor Ker lje a l zersug rnak val kitetts get PERICOLO Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco Evitare l esposizione al raggio laser FARE Usynlig laserstraling nar kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill Unng eksponering for laserstr len NIEBEZPIECZENSTWO niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady Nale y unika na wietlenia promieniem lasera ONACHO Hegsngnmoe na3epHoe n3nyyeHne Npr N3BNEYEHHbIX kaprpukax n CHATUNM GNOKUpoBKU V36eralite Boa3nelicreua nasepHelx nyye
187. getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems Before loading transparencies flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together Paper guidelines Paper characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these factors before printing on them Weight The printer trays and multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib grain long paper The 2100 sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60 135 g m 16 36 Ib grain long paper Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly and may cause jams Note Two sided printing is supported for 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib paper Paper and specialty media guide 181 Curl Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces th
188. gs menu General Settings General Settings menu Use To Display Language Set the language of the text that appears on the printer display English Note Not all languages are available for all printer models Francais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portuguese Suomi Russian Polski Greek Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Show Supply Estimates Get an estimate on the status of supplies Show estimates Do not show estimates Notes Show estimates displays the estimated supply status in pages on the printer control panel printer Web page and on the Menu Settings and the Device Statistics reports Do not show estimates hides the estimated supply status in any location a Understanding the printer menus 220 Use To Eco Mode Minimize the use of energy paper or specialty media Off Energy Energy Paper Paper Notes For touch screen printer models touch Eco Mode and then select from the options Offisthe factory default setting Off resets the printer to its factory default settings Energy minimizes the power used by the printer Performance may be affected but print quality is not Energy Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job Performance may be affected but print quality is not Quie
189. gt Print Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to N gt Reports Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to rw Reports Print Directory Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Jobs or press ix on the keypad 2 Touch the print job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Using MS810de 120 Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder a Click or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type control printers C Press Enter or click OK 2 Double click the printer icon 3 Select the print job you want to cancel 4 Click Delete For Macintosh users 1 From the Apple Menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences Print amp Fax select a printer Open Print Queue System Preferences Print amp Scan select a printer Open Print Queue 2 From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel and then click Delete Managing your printer Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For mor
190. h as all page 1 s and all page 2 s Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless of the number of copies printed This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Quality menu Use To Print Resolution Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch 300 dpi Note 600 dpi is the factory default setting 600 dpi 1200 dpi 1200 Image Q 2400 Image Q Pixel Boost Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity in order to enhance images horizontally off or vertically or to enhance fonts Fonts Note Off is the factory default setting Horizontally Vertically Both directions Isolated Toner Darkness Lighten or darken the printed output 1 10 Notes 8 is the factory default setting Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner Understanding the printer menus 236 a Use To Enhance Fine Lines Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings maps electrical On circuit diagrams and flow charts Off Notes Offis the factory default setting You can set this option from the printer software For Windows users click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus To set this option using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP a
191. h is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then processes it appropriately When set to On the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data When set to Off the printer does not perform NPA processing Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Serial Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Set the size of the serial input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before no
192. handshaking settings Robust XON Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON XOFF Baud Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port 1200 Notes 2400 4800 9600 is the factory default setting 9600 138200 172800 230400 and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the 19200 Standard Serial menu These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1 Serial Option 2 or Serial Option 3 menus 38400 57600 115200 138200 172800 230400 345600 Data Bits Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame 7 8 Note 8 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 213 Use To Parity Set the parity for serial input and output data frames Even Note None is the factory default setting Odd None Ignore Honor DSR Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal On Notes Off e Offis the factory default setting DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing x SMTP Setup menu Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port
193. hase for a relocation kit Clearing jams 261 Clearing jams Carefully select paper and specialty media and load them properly to avoid most jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 261 If jams occur then follow the steps outlined in this chapter Note Jam recovery is set to Auto by default The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks Avoiding jams Load paper properly Make sure paper lies flat in the tray Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper p P i P Q Ns T Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing Do not load a tray while the printer is printing Load it before printing or wait for a prompt to load it Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator Clearing jams 262 Do not slide the paper into the tray Load paper as shown in the illustration Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly against the paper or envelopes Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper f you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray Printing Orientation Tray One sided The short edge with holes enters the printer first Two
194. he electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports Safety information 8 This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a service representative CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as a power cord a fax feature or USB cable during a lightning storm CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You
195. he number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the print job and then resend the job Did the job print Step 3 The problem is solved Go to step 4 a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory b Resend the print job Did the job print Step 4 The problem is solved Go to step 5 a Disable the Page Protect feature From the printer control panel navigate to Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery gt Page Protect gt Off b Resend the print job Did the job print Ne SJ Troubleshooting Step 5 Install additional printer memory and then resend the print job Did the job print X 309 Print jobs do not print Action a Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a From the document you are trying to print open the Print dialog and check if you have selected the correct printer Note If the printer is not the default printer then you must select the printer for each document that you want to print b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on and if Ready appears on the printer display b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Step 3 The problem is solved Go to step 4 If an error message appears on the prin
196. he paper type Yes Go to step 2 334 Specify the paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Step 2 Check if you are printing on paper with texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper texture Go to step 3 Step 3 Weight to Heavy b Resend the print job Does the toner rub off a From the Paper Weight menu on the printer control panel set Heavy Go to step 4 The problem is solved Step 4 a Enable Quiet mode From the printer control panel navigate to Settings General Settings Quiet Mode On b Resend the print job Does the toner rub off Sig Contact customer support The problem is solved Transparency print quality is poor Action Step 1 From the printer control panel set the paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency Yes Go to step 2 Set the paper type to Transparency Step 2 a Checkif you are using a recommended type of transparency b Resend the print job Is the print quality still poor N Contact customer support The problem is solved Troubleshooting Uneven print density BS ABCD ABCD 335 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the print
197. he printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when these are not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting Print Recovery Jam Recovery On Off Auto Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages Notes Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks Onsets the printer to always reprint jammed pages Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Print Recovery Jam Assist On Off Set the printer to check for jammed paper automatically Note On is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Print Recovery Page Protect Off On 228 zo Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise Notes Offis the factory default setting Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Hibernate Timeout on Connection Do Not Hibernate Hibernate Tosetthe printer to follow the setting of Hibernate Timeout even when an active Ethernet connection exists Notes f Hibernate Timeout on Connection is set to Do Not Hibernate then the printer never automatically hibernates f Hibernate Timeout on Connection is set to
198. he printer memory until you start the print job from the printer All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs 2 Press mn Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them For Windows users 1 With a document open click File Print 2 Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Print and Hold 4 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 5 Click OK or Print 6 From the printer control panel release the print job For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 73 For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verif
199. he warning message and generates an e mail about the status of the supply The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached Continuable Stop The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached and the user needs to press a button to continue printing Non Continuable Stopt The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached The supply must be replaced to continue printing 1 The printer generates an e mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage 4 Click Submit Modifying confidential print settings Note This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Configuration Other Settings tab Security Confidential Print Setup Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 76 3 Modify the settings Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts all of the jobs for that user are deleted Setanexpira
200. i en eerte rea tete 272 x page jam clear manual feeder 250 esses eene 273 x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 274 x page jam remove paper open finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451 278 x page jam remove paper open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 41y xx 279 x page jam remove paper open expander rear door Leave paper in bin 43y xx 281 Troubleshooting sore Evan n aae a EN ENSE FO ee E e x eo E On Devas dO Understanding the printer messages eesssssseseeeeeeene eere eene nmn nnne nennen nennt nn nnns seen nen nene 283 Solving printer problems oc tte ot date te E e rte ies cederet ae avt te eeu event dae eate eet enden 302 Solving home screen applications problems essssesseeseee eene nnne nenne nennen nnne nnns 336 Embedded Web Server does not open sssssssesseseeseeeeneee nennen enema n nnne nennen ener nnn n 337 Contacting customer suppott 15 ere rt eee ces New ae A se eoe aaa A ER ree Eee suse Oen aras 337 Misid e CONNECTER 8 oO Product information icc een een er te n e ce eco as ecce es ae 339 Edition Noti E REPRE TRRRTERRRETDETRCTEDETRUPR 339 POWEF CONSUMPTION nde cedi eee ere t eae e ree d E RUE ER a ae at
201. ices Product information Product name Lexmark MS810 Machine type 4063 Model s 210 230 23E 410 430 630 63E Edition notice April 2012 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services
202. idiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Taffy Agfa Corporation Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc Univers Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries J All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Licensing notices All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD Noise emission levels See www lexmark com for current values EU waste electronics information The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options click EU Waste Electronics Information Product disposal Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options Notices 342 Static sensitivity notice This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark ENERGY STAR Temperature information Ambient temperature 15 6 C 32
203. ight Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Envelope Weight Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Rough Envelope Weight Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Letterhead Weight Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Preprinted Weight Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Understanding the printer menus SSS 196 Use To Colored Weight Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Light Weight Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is light Light Heavy Weight Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is heavy Heavy Rough Cotton Weight Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Custom x Weight Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded Light Notes Normal Heavy Normal is the factory default setting The options appear only when the custom type is supported NS J Paper Loading menu Use Card Stock Loading Duplex off To Determine and set two sided prin
204. iguration You can export configuration settings into a text file and then import it to apply the settings to other printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings Apps Apps Management 3 From the list of installed applications click the name of the application you want to configure 4 Click Configure and then do one of the following Toexport a configuration to a file click Export and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file Notes When saving the configuration file you can type a unique file name or use the default name Using MS812de 142 Ifa JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved To import a configuration from a file click Import and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer Notes Before importing the configuration file you can choose to preview it first or load it directly fatimeout occurs and a blank screen appears then refresh the Web browser and then click Apply Loading paper and specialty media The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information
205. images still appear N Yes Contact customer support at http support lexmar k com or your service representative The problem is solved Troubleshooting Gray background on prints Leading edge 320 Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge a Remove the toner cartridge b Remove the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems c Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge d Resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a From the Quality Menu on the printer control panel decrease the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Step 3 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints The problem is solved Contact customer support Horizontal voids appear on prints Leading edge LDR Sane E E Trailing edge Troubleshooting Action 321 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning
206. indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes types or weights in the same tray mixing results in jams Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Paper and specialty media guide 182 Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use grain long for 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib paper Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not When in doubt contact your paper supplier Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscientious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser electrophotographic printers While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole including the following Amount of post consumer waste Lexmark tests up to 100 post consumer
207. ings Point Size 1 00 1008 00 Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts Notes 12 is the factory default setting Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 0 014 inch Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0 25 point increments PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes 10 is the factory default setting Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For nonscalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but it cannot be changed PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page Notes Portrait is the factory default setting Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 Specify the number of lines that print on each page Notes 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the Paper Size and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 m
208. int envelope seals when printing 305 error reading flash drive 305 held jobs do not print 304 incorrect characters print 306 incorrect margins on prints 321 jammed pages are not reprinted 316 job prints from wrong tray 306 job prints on wrong paper 306 jobs do not print 309 Large jobs do not collate 307 multiple language PDF files do not print 308 paper curl 322 paper frequently jams 317 print job takes longer than expected 308 tray linking does not work 310 unexpected page breaks occur 311 troubleshooting print quality blank pages 327 characters have jagged edges 318 clipped pages or images 318 compressed images appear on prints 319 gray background on prints 320 horizontal voids appear on prints 320 print irregularities 323 print is too dark 324 print is too light 325 printer is printing solid black pages 328 repeating defects appear on prints 328 shadow images appear on prints 329 skewed print 330 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 330 streaked vertical lines 331 toner fog or background shading appears on prints 333 toner rubs off 333 toner specks appear on prints 333 transparency print quality is poor 334 uneven print density 335 white streaks on a page 335 troubleshooting printer options 2100 sheet tray problems 312 internal option is not detected 313 internal print server 314 Internal Solutions Port 315 tray problems 314 USB parallel interface card 316 troubleshooting printing printing slows down 31
209. inter control panel select Cancel job to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Install additional printer memory Network x software error 54 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Turn off the printer wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Troubleshooting 294 Update the network firmware in the printer or print server For more information contact customer support Non Lexmark supply type see User s Guide 33 xy Note The supply type can be toner cartridge or imaging unit The printer has detected a non Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts Use of third party supplies or parts may affect the performance reliability or life of the printer and its imaging components All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable results if third party supplies or parts are used Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or associated components Warning Potential Damage Use of third party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage Damage caused by the use of third party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty To accept a
210. inter is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Use the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action Note Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Touch 1 Change language Change the primary language of the printer 2 Bookmarks Create organize and save a set of bookmarks URLs into a tree view of folders and file links Note The tree view does not include bookmarks created within Forms and Favorites and the ones in the tree are not usable in Forms and Favorites 3 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs Using MS810de 90 Touch To 4 USB View select or print photos and documents from a flash drive Note This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer 5 Menus Access printer menus Note These menus are available only when the printer is in ready state 6 Status message bar e Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy Show printer conditions such as Imaging unit loworCartridge Low Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them 7 Status Supplies Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing View more information on the printer warning or message and on how
211. inter is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red The printer requires user intervention J Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status Sleep button light Printer status off The printer is idle or in Ready state Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode Blinking amber The printer is waking from or entering Hibernate mode Blinking amber for 0 1 second then goes The printer is in Hibernate mode completely off for 1 9 seconds in pulsing pattern is Understanding the home screen When the printer is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Use the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action Note Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Search Held Jobs Held Jobs Forms and Favorites Eco Settings A ETR v 3 8 7 6 5 Touch To Search Held Jobs Search current held jobs Held Jobs Display all current held jobs Forms and Favorites Access frequently used online forms ml wi n re Eco Settings Adjust energy consumption noise toner and paper usage Using MS812de 136 Touch To 5 Menus Access printer menus Note These menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state 6 Status message bar e Show the cu
212. is menu appears only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Wiping Mode Specify the mode for disk wiping Auto Understanding the printer menus Use Automatic Method Single pass Multiple pass cr 217 Mark all disk space used by a previous print job This method does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared Notes Single pass is the factory default setting Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn the printer off for an extended amount of time Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method M Security Audit Log menu r Use To Export Log Let an authorized user export the audit log Notes To export the audit log from the printer control panel a flash drive must be attached to the printer The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved on a computer Delete Log Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Configure Log Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created Enable Audit Notes Yes No Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog No is the factory default setting Enable Remote Syslog PUE y 8 No Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server No is the Yes facto
213. it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed For more information visit the Lexmark security Web page or see the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide 1 Goto http support lexmark com and then navigate to Support amp Downloads Tech Library Manuals amp Guides 2 In the Keyword field type Embedded Web Server and then click Filter 3 Click Embedded Web Server to launch the document Using MS810de 86 Using MS810de Learning about the printer Printer configurations Basic model 1 Standard bin 2 Printer control panel 3 Multipurpose feeder i 4 Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 Fully configured model CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray or more than one input option If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Using MS810de 87 The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional finishers and trays that are supported by the printer For more information on other configurations visit http support lexmark com 8 Hardware option Alternative hardware option 1 Staple finisher Output expander
214. it pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toute interf rence recue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Cet appareil a t concu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licence cet appareil doit tre utilis l int rieur et loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industry Canada Notice to users in the European Union This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 1999 5 EC and 2009 125 EC on the appro
215. ive M Tray linking does not work Notes The trays can detect paper length The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size You must set the size from the Paper Size Type menu Action Step 1 a Open the trays and then check if they contain paper of the same size and type Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in each tray Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray b Resend the print job Do the trays link correctly X Yes The problem is solved ee Go to step 2 he Troubleshooting Action Step 2 menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked Note The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked b Resend the print job Do the trays link correctly bs a Fromthe printer control panel setthe paper size and typein the Paper Yes The problem is solved 311 oo Contact customer support Unexpected page breaks occur Action Step 1 Adjust the print timeout settings a From the printer control panel navigate to Settings General Settings Timeouts Print Timeout b Select a higher setting and then depending on your printer model select OK or Submit c Resend the print job Did the file print correctly Yes The problem is solved M E Go to s
216. k Mode Specify the network mode BSS Type Notes Infrastructure Ad hoc Infrastructure is the factory default setting This lets the printer access a network using an access point Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer Compatibility Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network 802 11b g Note 802 11b g n is the factory default setting Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network AppleTalk menu Note This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional wireless network adapter is installed To access the menu navigate to either of the following Network Ports Standard Network Standard Network Setup AppleTalk Network Ports Network x Network x Setup AppleTalk Understanding the printer menus Use 207 To Activate Enable or disable AppleTalk support Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name Note The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address Note The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the
217. k Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 3 In the Sleep Mode field enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode 4 Click Submit Using MS812de 173 Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts gt Sleep Mode 2 Inthe Sleep Mode field select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode and then touch Submit Using Hibernate mode Hibernate is an ultra low power operating mode When operating in Hibernate mode the printer is essentially off and all other systems and devices are turned off safely Note The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Opena Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Sleep Button Settings 3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop down menu select Hibernate 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings 2 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep
218. k where data is stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply turn off the printer Erasing non volatile memory Erase individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions by following these steps 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display instead of the standard home screen icons 3 Touch Wipe All Settings The printer restarts several times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings solutions jobs and passwords from the printer memory 4 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Using MS812de 177 Erasing printer hard disk memory Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Re
219. ld in the printer until you delete them For Windows users 1 2 3 4 uw With a document open click File gt Print Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup Click Print and Hold Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN Click OK or Print 6 From the printer home screen release the print job For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print Using MS810de 119 For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 From the printer home screen release the print job For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies
220. lease the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Touch Wipe Disk and then touch one of the following Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a printer hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes Astatus bar indicates the progress of the disk wiping task Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back Exit Config Menu The printer undergoes a power on reset and then returns to normal operating mode Configuring printer hard disk encryption Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP sectio
221. lications using the Embedded Web Server For more information on accessing the Embedded Web Server see Accessing the Embedded Web Server on page 92 Using MS812de 140 For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications do the following 1 Goto http support lexmark com and then click SELECT YOUR PRODUCT gt gt 2 Do either of the following Click Business Solutions and then select the name of the application Click Software and Solutions Other Apps 3 Click the Manuals tab and then select the document for the home screen application Using Background and Idle Screen Customize the background and idle screen of your printer home screen r From the home screen navigate to Change Background select background to use Apply Setting up Forms and Favorites Simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen Note The printer must have permission to access the network folder FTP site or Web site where the bookmark is stored From the computer where the bookmark is stored use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access For more information see the documentation that came with your operating system M A 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP addr
222. ling a print job from a computer 74 120 167 from the printer control panel 73 119 167 cannot open Embedded Web Server 337 card stock loading 62 108 156 tips 179 Cartridge low 88 xy 283 Cartridge nearly low 88 xy 283 Cartridge very low 88 xy 283 Cartridge imaging unit mismatch 41 xy 283 Change paper source to custom string 283 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 284 355 Change paper source to custom type name 284 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 284 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 284 Change paper source to paper type paper size 284 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation 285 Check tray x connection 285 checking an unresponsive printer 302 checking status of parts and supplies 77 123 170 checking the status of parts and supplies 77 123 171 checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 74 120 168 checking virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 168 cleaning exterior of the printer 257 cleaning the printer 257 Close door or insert cartridge 285 Close finisher side door 285 Close front door 285 Complex page some data may not have printed 39 286 compressed images appear on prints 319 confidential jobs modifying print settings 75 121 169 confidential print jobs 71 117 165 printing from a Macintosh computer 72 118 166 printing from Windows 72
223. ll find a similar font and reformat the affected text Cancel the current print job Troubleshooting 295 Paper changes needed Try one or more of the following Select Use current supplies on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Cancel the current print job Parallel port x disabled 56 Try one or more of the following Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm The printer discards any data received through the parallel port Select Reset active bin to reset the bin for a linked set of bins Reattach bin x Try one or more of the following Turn off the printer and then turn it back on Reattach the specified bin uy Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the specified bin 4 Reattach the bin 5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 6 Turn the printer back on Remove the specified bin 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the specified bin 4 Contact customer support Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and print without using the specified bin For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Reattach bins x y Try one or more of the following Turn off the printer and the
224. m Set the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes e 198 mm is the factory default setting The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty 10 pitch characters Understanding the printer menus Use PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF On Off 241 Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after a line feed LF control command Note Off is the factory default setting PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR On Off Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a carriage return CR control command Note Off is the factory default setting Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Off None 0 199 Assign Tray x Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Env Off None 0 199 Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays and feeders Notes Off is the factory default setting None ignores the Select Paper Feed command This option appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter e 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned Tray Renumber View Factory Defaults MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T1 Default 4 T1 Default 5 T1 Default 20 T1 Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MEnv Default 3 Display the factory default setting assigned to each
225. maging unit out of the printer using the handle 4 Unpack the new imaging unit and then remove all packing materials Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the shiny blue photoconductor drum under the imaging unit Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs Maintaining the printer 255 5 Shake the new imaging unit gt 6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer 7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer Maintaining the printer 256 8 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover Replacing a staple cartridge 1 Open the stapler door 2 Pull down the latch of the staple cartridge holder and then pull the holder out of the finisher ay Maintaining the printer 257 3 Squeeze both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers and then remove the staple case from the cartridge 5 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place 6 Close the stapler door Cleaning the printer parts Cleaning the printer Note You may need to perform this task after every few mo
226. me m P Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Active NIC Allow the printer to connect to a network Auto list of available network cards Notes Auto is the factory default setting This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed Standard Network or Network x menu Note Only active ports appear in this menu All inactive ports are omitted Understanding the printer menus Use 202 To PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires On it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting f PCL SmartSwitch is disabled then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it On regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting If PS SmartSwitch is disabled then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional Off communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Auto Notes Auto is the factory default setting Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus caus
227. must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray or more than one input option If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Overview Overview Using this guide This User s Guide provides general and specific information on using the printer models that are listed on the cover page The following chapters contain information applicable to all printer models Selecting a location for the printer Additional printer setup Paper and specialty media guide Understanding printer menus Saving money and the environment Maintaining the printer Clearing jams Troubleshooting To find instructions for your printer Use the table of contents Use the Search function or the Find toolbar of your application to search for page content Finding information about the printer Find it here What are you looking for Initial setup instructions Connecting the printer Installing the printer software Setup documentation The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Additional setup and instructions for using the printer
228. n Open a context sensitive Help dialog on the printer control panel Scroll to the left Ballad Scroll to the right Using MS810de 92 Setting up and using the home screen applications Notes Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded applications Some applications are supported only in select printer models There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase For more information visit www lexmark com or inquire at your point of purchase Accessing the Embedded Web Server The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 1 Obtain the printer IP address From the printer control panel home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field The Embedded Web Server page appears Customizing the home screen 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of number
229. n to 176 x 250 mm 6 9 x 9 8 in 1 f your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel then you may select common paper sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size Type menu If the paper size is not available then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing For more information contact customer support To support two sided duplex printing the Universal width must be between 105 mm 4 13 inches and 216 mm 8 5 inches the Universal length must be between 148 mm 5 83 inches and 356 mm 14 inches lt Paper sizes types and weights supported by the finishers Supported paper sizes Paper size 4 bin mailbox Output expander and Staple finisher Staple hole punch high capacity output finisher expander A6 V V X X id v v v v3 1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it The finisher staples the paper if it is loaded short edge first S Paper and specialty media guide 186 Paper size 4 bin mailbox Output expander and Staple finisher Staple hole punch high capacity output finisher expander JIS BS vV vV v v Executive V V y V Letter vV vV i y y v Legal JV v Vv Folio vV vV Vv Statement V V V V Universal V V X X Envelopes X v X X 1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or p
230. n MS811dn MS812dn 82 Securing the printer Using the security lock feature The printer is equipped with a security lock feature When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached the printer is locked When locked the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be removed Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown mt Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings and user data Type of memory Description Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs Non volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information bookmark settings and embedded solutions Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard disk is designed for device specific functionality This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs as well as form data and font data M A Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances The printer is being decommissioned The printer hard disk is being replaced The printer is being moved to a different department or location The printer is being serviced by someone from outside y
231. n Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Type the correct Make sure the printer IP address is correct printer IP addressin the View the printer IP address address field of your Web browser From the printer home screen Note Depending on From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu the network settings By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then you may need to type finding the TCP IP section https instead of Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by http before the periods such as 123 123 123 123 printer IP address to access the Embedded Is the printer IP address correct WeB SENEN Step 2 Go to step 3 Turn on the printer Check if the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on Step 3 Go to step 4 Contact your system Check if the network connection is working support person Is the network connection working Step 4 Go to step 5 Tighten the cable Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure connection For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure Step 5 Go to step 6 Contact your system support person Step 6 Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address in the address field Did the Embedded Web Server open The problem is solved Contact customer support Contacting customer support When y
232. n in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Security Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed 3 From the Disk encryption menu select Enable Using MS812de 178 Notes Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Touch Disk Encryption Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes Do notturn off the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks As
233. n the printer IP address From the printer home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field The Embedded Web Server page appears Customizing the home screen 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Do one or more of the following Show or hide icons of basic printer functions a Click Settings General Settings Home screen customization b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen Note If you clear a check box beside an icon then the icon does not appear on the home screen c Click Submit Customize the icon for an application For more information see Finding information about the home screen applications on page 139 or see the documentation that came with the application Activating the home screen applications Finding information about the home screen applications Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications Before you can use these applications first activate and set up these app
234. n turn it back on Reattach the specified bins 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Troubleshooting 296 3 Remove the specified bins 4 Reattach the bins 5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 6 Turn the printer back on Remove the specified bins 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the specified bins 4 Contact customer support Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and print without using the specified bins For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy Try one or more of the following Check if the toner cartridge is missing If missing install the toner cartridge For information on installing the cartridge see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide fthe toner cartridge is installed then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinstalling the supply then the cartridge is defective Replace the toner cartridge Reinstall missing or unresponsive fuser 31 xy Try one or more of the following Remove the unresponsive fuser and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinstalling the supply then the fuser is defective Replace the fuser Install the missing fuser For more information on installing the fus
235. n your operating system specify the paper type texture Yes Go to step 4 325 a The problem is solved Step 4 Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper From the printer control panel change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on Go to step 5 Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Go to step 6 The problem is solved Step 6 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the print still too dark Contact customer support The problem is solved Print is too light Action Step 1 darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Is the print still too light is a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel increase the toner Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved Troubleshooting 326 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Action Yes No Step 2 Go to step 3 Change the paper type From the printer control panel set the paper type texture
236. nces 11 12 Index models 45 86 132 moving 11 12 258 260 selecting a location 11 12 shipping 260 printer control panel adjusting brightness 80 factory defaults restoring 81 127 174 indicator light 48 88 134 parts 47 88 134 Sleep button light 48 88 134 using 47 88 134 printer control panel virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 74 120 printer hard disk disposing of 82 128 175 encrypting 84 130 177 installing 24 removing 29 wiping 84 129 177 printer hard disk encryption 84 130 177 printer hard disk memory erasing 84 129 177 printer information where to find 9 printer is printing blank pages 327 printer messages x page jam clear manual feeder 250 273 x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 200 201 265 x page jam open tray x 24x 272 x page jam open upper and lower rear door 231 234 269 x page jam open upper rear door 202 268 x page jam remove paper open expander rear door Leave paper in bin 43y xx 281 x page jam remove paper open finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451 278 x page jam remove paper open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 41y xx 279 x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 274 x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 271 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 271 Cartridge low 88 xy 283 Cartridge nearly low 88 xy 283 Cartridge ve
237. nd operate the printer 2 Select button Submit changes made in the printer settings 3 Arrow buttons Scroll up and down or left and right 4 Keypad Enter numbers letters or symbols 5 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode Press any hard button Pull out Tray 1 or load paper in the multipurpose feeder Open a door or cover Send a print job from the computer Perform a power on reset with the main power switch Attach a device to the USB port on the printer 6 Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity 7 Back button Return to the previous screen 8 Home button Go to the home screen 9 Indicator light Check the status of the printer 10 USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer L Note Only the front USB port supports flash drives J 47 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 48 Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights The colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status Indicator light Printer status Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red The printer requires user intervention J Sleep button light color
238. nd trays that are supported by the printer For more information on other configurations visit http support lexmark com 8 1 Staple finisher Hardware option Alternative hardware option Output expander 4 bin mailbox 2 4 bin mailbox Output expander High capacity output expander Staple finisher Caster base None 2100 sheet tray None 550 sheet tray 250 sheet tray 250 sheet tray 550 sheet tray 4 bin mailbox Output expander oe ou AU Output expander 4 bin mailbox In a configuration with two or more optional finishers The staple finisher must always be on top The high capacity output expander must always be at the bottom The output expander is the only finisher that can be placed on top of the high capacity output expander The output expander and mailbox may be installed in any order Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn When using optional trays Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with a 2100 sheet tray The 2100 sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration A maximum of four optional trays may be configured with the printer The optional 250 and 550 sheet trays may be installed in any order Using the printer control panel Jeons giv gwxyz Oo d 10 9 8 7 Use the To 1 Display View the printer status Set up a
239. nder Note Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open 3 Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Note Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of tray to help position the guides Using MS812de 158 4 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Note Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies Be careful not to scratch them Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them Straighten the edges on a level surface Using MS812de 159 5 Load the paper or specialty media Note Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Without an optional staple finisher One sided printing One sided printing Two sided duplex printing Two sided duplex printing Using MS812de 160 Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps sn
240. ne or more of the following Fromthe printer control select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Format the flash memory Note If the error message remains then the flash memory may be defective and need to be replaced Unsupported disk An unsupported disk has been inserted Remove the unsupported disk and then install a supported one Unsupported option in slot x 55 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Troubleshooting 302 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board and then replace it with a supported card 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on USB port x disabled 56 Try one or more of the following Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press E3 to confirm The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port Select Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Make sure the USB Buffer menu is enabled Solving printer problems Printer does not respond on page 302 Printing problems on page 304 Hardware and internal option problems on page 312 Paper feed problems on page 316 Print quality problems on page 318 Printer does not respond The printer is not responding Action Step 1
241. ner Studies show that as much as 80 of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting see the following Using Eco Mode on page 77 for non touch screen printer models Using Eco Mode on page 123 and Using Eco Mode on page 171 for touch screen printer models Using recycled paper As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 182 Conserving supplies Use both sides of the paper If your printer model supports duplex printing then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2 sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing N Up section of the Print dialog screen Check your first draft for accuracy Before printing or making mul
242. nimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt star i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Model specific information The following information applies only to the MS812de model Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or b
243. nnn 170 Priritirig a networksetup paBe iE ana iste rettet iei 170 Checking the status of parts and supplies eeecessececcessssceceecessneececcsesesseeeceessseceesessasseescesesaasaeseseessaaaaes 170 SEITDEM CIIM 171 Restoring factory default settihgs 5 sti teen ape ib dec pee RESO sre e aaa 174 Securing the memory before moving the printer cccccccecsssseececessssssececesssseseecesecssseeececsseseeesceseeesssenseses 175 Paper and specialty media guide eee eere eee eee eee 179 Using specialty media ee rsen an nene ene E AE aee YR FUP RR KE Ea ae M eese ee au ah ex n Ya To aa neus 179 Paper guidelines 3 ret rix ta etre varo ne eee Ee Pe FERREA Rea Pe vs AVR Pr PERI RIRTER TRO MER et deasauaedsedeae 180 Supported paper sizes types and weights nenne ener nennen nennen nsns eene senis 183 Understanding the printer menus e eee eee eene eee eene eene LOO Men s Stirrar H 188 Faper MENU msi Dm 189 Reports MENU srna EEan en PEENE EERE EDE EN EER TOPAY EET NEATE KELE REEERE NEET VEERE EET E E 200 Network Ports M nUu cccccssssssssccccccessssssssecccccsscesssssceesesescessessusueccescsessssssssecesesesesssssessssnsseuesesseseess 201 SECUMILY MON rar ES 214 Settings MON ics c 219 Help mMenu iicet etm REI eerie eed oa a IPM 243 Saving money and the environment ecce eee eee ee eene eee enun eese 24D
244. not staple or punch holes in it X Understanding the printer menus Understanding the printer menus Menus list Paper Menu Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Weight Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names 2 Custom Bin Names 2 Universal Setup Bin Setup Security Edit Security Setups 4 Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Disk Wiping Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Reports Menu Settings Page Device Statistics Stapler Test Network Setup Page Profiles List Print Fonts Print Directory Asset Report Settings General Settings Flash Drive Menu Print Settings 188 Network Ports Active NIC Standard Network Standard USB Parallel x Serial x SMTP Setup Help Print All Guides Print Quality Printing Guide Print Defects Guide Information Guide Supplies Guide Depending on the printer setup this menu item appears as Network Setup Page or Network x Setup Page Depending on the printer setup this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network x 3 This menu appears only in touch screen printer models This menu appears only in select touch screen printer models Understanding the printer menus 189 Paper menu Default Source menu Use To Default Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs Tray x Notes MP Feeder Manual Paper Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default
245. nsion cords Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies or extension cords power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 6 Turn on the switch or Go to step 7 Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker reset the breaker Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker Step 7 Connect the printer Go to step 8 Step 8 Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer and the other to the computer print server option or other network device Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Go to step 9 Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Step 9 Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing material Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material removed Go to step 10 Turn off the printer remove all packing materials then reinstall the hardware options and then turn on the printer Step 10 Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver Are the port settings correct Go to step 11 Use correct printer driver settings Troubleshooting Action Step 11 Check the installed printer driver Is the correct printe
246. nt is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espa ol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir v a essi vara er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Notices 350 Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar
247. nt uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Limitation of liability You
248. ntact customer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to support Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery gt Jam Recovery 2 Select On or Auto 3 Depending on your printer model press OK or touch Submit b Resend the pages that did not print Were the jammed pages reprinted NS Troubleshooting 317 Paper frequently jams Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Pull out the tray and then do one or more of the following Make sure paper lies flat in the tray Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type b Insert the tray properly If jam recovery is enabled then the print jobs will reprint automatically Do paper jams still occur frequently Go to step 3 The problem is solved Step 2 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do paper jams still occur frequently Step 3 a Reviewthetips on avoiding jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 261 b Follow the recommendations and then resend the print job Contact customer support Do paper jams s
249. nter options troubleshooting 2100 sheet tray problems 312 printer problems solving basic 302 printer setup verifying 43 printer software installing 35 printing canceling from printer control panel 119 167 directory list 73 119 167 font sample list 73 119 167 forms 114 162 from flash drive 70 116 164 from Macintosh 68 115 163 from Windows 68 115 163 menu settings page 76 122 170 network setup page 77 122 170 printing a directory list 119 167 printing a document 68 115 163 printing a font sample list 119 167 printing a menu settings page 122 170 printing a network setup page 77 122 170 361 printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer 72 118 166 from Windows 72 118 166 printing forms 114 162 printing from a flash drive 70 116 164 printing slows down 310 publications where to find 9 Push Button Configuration method using 39 Quality menu 235 Quiet mode 78 124 using 172 R Reattach bin x 295 Reattach bin x y 295 recycled paper using 182 245 recycling Lexmark packaging 246 Lexmark products 246 toner cartridges 246 reducing noise 78 124 reducing printer noise 172 Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy 296 Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy 296 Remote Operator Panel setting up 94 141 Remove defective disk 61 296 Remove packaging material area name 297 Remove paper from linked set bin name 297 Remove pape
250. nters Note If you want to add or remove target printers then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP 6 Click Copy Printer Settings Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to x Reports Menu Settings Page Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to x Reports Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected If the status is Not Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult your system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Using MS810de 123 Checking the status of parts and supplies A message appears on the printer display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Notes Each gauge displays the estimated life left for the supply or part All page life estimates for supplies assume printing on a single side of letter or A4 size plain paper Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel From the home screen touch Status Supplies View Supplies Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server Note Make sure the computer and the print
251. nths Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder 3 Remove any dust lint and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum Maintaining the printer 258 4 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water and use it to wipe the outside of the printer Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior of the printer 5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job Emptying the hole punch box 1 Pull out the hole punch box 2 Empty the container 3 Insert the emptied hole punch box back into the finisher until it clicks into place E Moving the printer Before moving the printer CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn off the printer and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer f two or more optional finishers are installed then
252. nus Notes The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm 2 76 x 5 inches for one sided printing and 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 inches for two sided duplex printing The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches for one sided and two sided printing 1 From the home screen navigate to Aj gt Paper Menu gt Universal Setup gt Units of Measure gt select a unit of measure 2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height 3 Select the width or height and then touch ZS f Loading the 250 or 550 sheet tray CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray Notes When loading folio legal or oficio size paper lift the tray slightly and pull it out Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display Doing so may cause a jam Using MS810de 96 2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place Note Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS810de 97 3 Unlock the length guide and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Notes Lockthe length guide for all paper sizes Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position th
253. ny and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non genuine supplies or parts in your printer press and hold Lx and the button on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds For non touch screen printer models press OK and x on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue printing If you do not wish to accept these risks then remove the third party supply or part from your printer and then install a genuine Lexmark supply or part Note For a list of supported supplies see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press E3 to confirm Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the flash memory Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card Note Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted PPDS font error 50 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm f the printer cannot find the requested font then from the printer control panel navigate to PPDS menu gt Best Fit gt On The printer wi
254. o Toner Cartridge 524 High Yield Toner Cartridge 524H Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 524X For Africa Middle East Central Eastern Europe and Commonwealth of Independent States Toner Cartridge 525 High Yield Toner Cartridge 525H Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 525X This toner cartridge is supported only in MS811n MS811dn MS812dn and MS812ne printer models For more information on countries located in each region visit www lexmark com regions ha d Item Regular cartridge 000000000 Worldwide High Yield Toner Cartridge 520HA Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 520XA 1 This cartridge is supported only in MS810n and MS810dn printer models This cartridge is supported only in MS811n MS811dn MS812dn and MS812ne printer models lt Ordering an imaging unit Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner For more information on replacing the imaging unit see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Part name Lexmark Return Program Regular Imaging unit 520Z 520ZA Maintaining the printer 250 Ordering staple cartridges Part name Part number Staple cartridges 25A0013 Ordering a roller kit For more information on replacing the roller kit see the instruction sheet that came with the part Lexmark roller kit and part number Type Part number
255. o print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity The printer display is turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes Plain Paper Enable the automatic two sided duplex printing feature 4 Click Submit Reducing printer noise Enable Quiet mode to reduce the printer noise 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Settings gt OK gt General Settings gt OK gt Quiet Mode gt OK 2 Select a setting Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 79 Use To On Reduce printer noise Notes Print jobs process at a reduced speed Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There is a short delay before the first page is printed The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off The printer ignores the Advance Start command Off Use factory default settings Note This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer Me P 3 Press m Adjusting Sleep mode To save energy decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep mode Select from 1 to 120 The factory default setting is 30 min
256. obs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print Using MS812de 167 5 From the printer home screen release the print job For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Directory Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the printer control panel or press I lt on the keypad
257. oller kit 250 staple cartridges 250 ordering supplies toner cartridges 248 P paper characteristics 180 letterhead 182 preprinted forms 182 recycled 182 selecting 181 setting size 48 setting type 48 storing 180 183 unacceptable 182 Universal size setting 48 95 142 using recycled 245 Paper changes needed 295 paper characteristics 180 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 317 paper jams avoiding 261 paper jams clearing behind rear door 268 269 in duplex area 271 in finisher rear door 278 in mailbox rear door 279 in multipurpose feeder 273 in rear expander door 281 in standard bin 271 in staple finisher 274 in the tray 272 inside the printer 265 Paper Loading menu 196 paper size setting 95 142 Paper Size Type menu 189 paper sizes supported 184 Paper Texture menu 193 paper type setting 95 142 paper types supported 183 Paper Weight menu 194 paper weights supported 183 Parallel x menu 208 Parallel port x disabled 56 295 parts checking status 77 123 171 checking from printer control panel 123 checking on the printer control panel 170 checking using the Embedded Web Server 77 123 171 using genuine Lexmark 248 parts and supplies status of checking on printer control panel 77 PCL Emul menu 239 PDF menu 238 Personal Identification Number method using 39 port settings configuring 41 PostScript menu 239 PPDS font error 50 294 preparing to set up the printer on an
258. om bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method 4 Press the up or down arrow button until Yes appears and then proceed with disk wiping Notes Astatus bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Navigate to Back Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Configuring printer hard disk encryption Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Security Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security menu only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed 3 From the
259. on the floor Store individual packages on a flat surface Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer The carton and wrapper help keep the paper clean dry and flat Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support Note For an unlisted paper size select the closest arger listed size Paper types and weights supported by the printer The printer engine supports 60 176 g m2 16 47 Ib paper weights Paper and specialty media guide 184 Paper type 250 or 550 sheet 2100 sheet tray Multipurpose feeder Duplex trays Paper y y y y Card stock v X Jf J Plain Envelope vV X v X Rough Envelope V X V X Paper and Vinyl Labels V X V X Pharmacy labels X V Transparencies X X v v J Paper sizes supported by the printer Paper size Dimensions Standard or Optional Multipurpose Duplex optional 250 or 2100 sheet tray feeder 550 sheet trays A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 in v v v v A5 148 x 210 mm vV 5 8 x 8 3 in Y v v A6 105 x 148 mm X 4 1x 5 8 in v v v JIS B5 182 x 257 mm X 7 2 x 10 1 in v v v Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 in v v v 4 Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in M v v v Executive 184 x 267 mm
260. onformi mal htigijiet essenzjali u ma dispozizzjonijiet ohrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza ze niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostalymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s ALexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje Ze tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky prisluSn ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt star i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Index Index Numerics 2100 sheet tray installing 31 loading 55 101 149 250 sheet tray installing 31 550 sheet tray installing 31 Symbols
261. ontacting 337 D Default Source menu 189 Defective flash detected 51 286 device and network settings erasing 83 device and network settings information erasing 129 176 directory list printing 73 119 167 Disk full 62 286 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space 287 disk wiping 84 129 177 Disk Wiping menu 216 display troubleshooting printer display is blank 304 display printer control panel 47 88 adjusting brightness 80 126 173 disposing of printer hard disk 82 128 175 documents printing from Macintosh 68 115 163 from Windows 68 115 163 E Eco Mode setting 77 123 171 Eco Settings about 94 understanding 141 Edit Security Setups menu 214 embedded solutions erasing 83 embedded solutions information erasing 129 176 Embedded Web Server accessing 92 139 adjusting brightness 80 administrator settings 74 120 168 checking the status of parts 77 123 171 checking the status of supplies 77 123 171 356 copying settings to other printers 76 122 169 modifying confidential print settings 75 121 169 networking settings 74 120 168 problem accessing 337 Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide where to find 74 85 120 131 168 178 emission notices 346 347 348 Empty the hole punch box 287 emptying the hole punch box 258 encrypting the printer hard disk 84 130 177 envelopes loading 62 108 156 tips on using 179 environmental settings conserving supplies 245 display brightness a
262. ontroller board electronic component or connector 1 Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector 2 Option card connector 3 Memory card connector Additional printer setup 5 Align the screws with the holes on the controller board shield and then reattach the controller board shield 6 Tighten the screws on the controller board shield 16 Additional printer setup 17 7 Reattach the controller board access cover VS 2 Installing a memory card A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 14 2 Unpack the memory card Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card Doing so m
263. or more of the following Replace or insert the specified staple cartridge in the finisher For instructions on inserting or replacing a staple cartridge in the finisher select More information on the printer control panel Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Select Cancel job to cancel the print job Load paper source with custom string paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper Tousethe tray that has the correct size or type of paper select Finished loading paperon the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Note If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the current job Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper Tousethe tray that has the correct size or type of paper select Finished loading paperon the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Note If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it feeds from that tray If the
264. orted Universal size is 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches for one sided and two sided printing From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Paper Menu gt OK gt Universal Setup gt OK gt Units of Measure gt OK gt select unit of measure gt OK Loading the 250 or 550 sheet tray CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray Notes When loading folio legal or oficio size paper lift the tray slightly and pull it out Avoid removing trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display Doing so may cause a jam Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 50 2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place Note Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 51 3 Unlock the length guide and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Notes Lock the length guide for all paper sizes e Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 52 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edg
265. ory default setting for Button Feedback 5 is the factory default setting for Volume Show Bookmarks Yes No Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Yes is the factory default setting When Yes is selected bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 120isthe factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 225 Use To Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Location Specify the location of the printer Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Alarms Setan alarm to sound when the printer requires user intervention Alarm Control For each alarm type select from the following options Cartridge Alarm Off Staple Alarm Single Hole Punch Alarm Continuous Notes Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control Single sounds three quick beeps Offis the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm Staple Alarm and Hole Punch Alarm Off means no alarm will sound Continuous repeats three be
266. ou contact customer support you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing the message on the printer display and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution Troubleshooting 338 You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label at the back of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem Visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com and then select one of the following Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals support documentation drivers and other downloads to help you solve common problems E mail You can send an e mail to the Lexmark team describing your problem A service representative will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems install updates or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product M Telephone support is also available In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries or regions visit http support lexmark com Notices 339 Not
267. our organization Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 83 The printer is being removed from your premises for service The printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a printer hard disk Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises Degaussing Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note Most data can be erased electronically but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed in your printer requires a power source toretain information To erase the buffered data turn off the printer Erasing non volatile memory Erase individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions by following these steps 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 on the keypad while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs
268. paper before loading it Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes weights or types in the same tray Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel Store paper per manufacturer recommendations Understanding jam messages and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer display Open the doors covers and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam Notes When Jam Assist is setto On Discarding pages appears on the display and the printer flushes blank or pages with partial prints to the standard bin after a jammed page is cleared Check your printed output for blank pages Clearing jams jammed pages if adequate printer memory is available 264 When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto the printer reprints jammed pages However the Auto setting reprints Jam location Printer message What to do r 1 Staple finisher x page jam remove paper open Remove paper from the stapler bin open the stapler stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 door then remove the staple cartridge and then 457 remove the jammed staples 2 Standard bin x page jam remove standard bin Remove jammed paper from the standard bin jam 203 3 Inside the printer x page jam liftfront cover to remove Open the front cover and the multip
269. pe Part number Type 07 40X8427 Type 08 40X8428 Type 09 40X8429 Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Do not expose supplies to Direct sunlight Temperatures above 35 C 95 F High humidity above 80 Salty air Corrosive gases Heavy dust Replacing supplies Replacing the toner cartridge 1 Lift the front cover and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door Maintaining the printer 252 2 Pull the cartridge out of the printer using the handle 3 Unpack the new toner cartridge then remove the packing material and then shake the cartridge to redistribute ur A 4 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer Note Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in Warning Potential Damage When replacing a toner cartridge do not leave the imaging unit exposed to direct light for an extended period of time Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems Maintaining the printer 253 5 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover Replacing the imaging unit 1 Lift the front cover and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door Maintaining the printer 254 2 Pull the cartridge out of the printer using the handle 3 Pull the i
270. plex sets the printer default to two sided printing for every print job unless one sided printing is selected from Print Properties or the print dialog depending on your operating system Custom Types menu Use Custom Type x Paper Card Stock Transparency Rough Cotton Labels Vinyl Labels Envelope To Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom type name or a user defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server or from MarkVision Professional Notes Paper is the factory default setting The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Determine and settwo sided printing for all print jobs with Letterhead Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Preprinted Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Colored Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Light as Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy as Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Rough or Determine and settwo sided printing for all print jobs with Custom x Understanding the printer menus 198 Use To Recycled Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus Paper Notes Card Stock Transparency Paper is the factory default setting Rough Cotton The custom media type must be supported by
271. pplies may cause damage to your printer Ordering supplies To order parts and supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts Use of third party supplies or parts may affect the performance reliability or life of the printer and its imaging components Use of third party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage Damage caused by the use of third party supplies or parts is not covered by the warranty All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable results if third party supplies or parts are used Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components Estimated number of remaining pages The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer Its accuracy may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors such as actual document content print quality settings and other printer settings The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is different from the historical printing cons
272. print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time Note The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu Notes Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs 2 Touch Submit Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them For Windows users 1 With a document open click File Print 2 Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Print and Hold 4 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 5 Click OK or Print 6 From the printer home screen release the print job For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies Print For other print jobs navigate to Held j
273. printing Two sided printing 106 Using MS810de 107 Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator i Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams 5 Insert the tray Note Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray Using MS810de 108 6 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Loading the multipurpose feeder 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door Note Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing Using MS810de 109 2 Pull the multipurpose feeder extender Note Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open 3 Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Note Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of tray to help position the guides Using MS810de 110 4 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Note Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies Be careful not to scratch them Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them Straighten the edges on a level surface Using MS810de 111
274. r menu on the printer control panel and then select Finished changing paper For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Cancel the print job Change paper source to paper type paper size Try one or more of the following Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then select Finished changing paper For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 285 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then select Finished changing paper For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Cancel the print job Check tray x connection Try one or more of the following Turn off the printer and then turn it back on If the error occurs a second time then 1 uU 5 WwW N 6 Turn off the printer Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Remove the specified tray Reattach the tray Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet Turn the printer back on If the error occurs again then 1 2 3 4 Turn off the printer Unplug the power cord from the electrical o
275. r board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 23 Installing an optional card CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 14 2 Unpack the optional card Warning Potential Damage Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins 1 on the card with the holes 2 on the controller board Additional printer setup 24 4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration Warning Potential Damage Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the controller board Note The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board 5 Close the controller board access door Note When the printer softw
276. r driver installed Yes Go to step 12 304 a Install the correct printer driver Step 12 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Is the printer working is The problem is solved Contact customer support Printer display is blank Action Step 1 Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel Does Ready appear on the printer display Yes The problem is solved M Go to step 2 Step 2 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display S The problem is solved Turn off the printer and then contact customer support Printing problems Confidential and other held jobs do not print mom Step 1 a From the printer control panel open the Held Jobs folder and then verify that your print job is listed b Resend the print job For more information see Printing confidential and other held jobs on page 72 for non touch screen printer models For touch screen printer models see Printing confidential and other held jobs on page 118 or Printing confidential and other held jobs on page 166 Did the jobs print bs Yes The problem is solved bs Go to step 2 M Troubleshooting Action Step 2 Do one or more of the following Delete the print job
277. r from all bins 297 Remove paper from bin x 297 Remove paper from standard output bin 297 removing printer hard disk 29 repeat print jobs 71 117 165 printing from a Macintosh computer 72 118 166 printing from Windows 72 118 166 Index repeating defects appear on prints 328 Replace cartridge O estimated pages remain 88 xy 297 Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy 297 Replace imaging unit O estimated pages remain 84 xy 298 Replace maintenance kit O estimated pages remain 80 xy 298 Replace missing cartridge 31 xy 298 Replace missing imaging unit 31 xy 298 Replace missing or unresponsive fuser 31 xy 296 Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy 298 Replace unsupported fuser 32 xy 299 Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy 299 replacing imaging unit 253 replacing a staple cartridge 256 replacing supplies staple cartridge 256 replacing the toner cartridge 251 Reports menu 200 reserve print jobs 71 165 printing from a Macintosh computer 72 118 166 printing from Windows 72 118 166 Restore held jobs 299 restoring factory default settings 127 174 roller kit ordering 250 S safety information 7 8 security modifying confidential print settings 75 121 169 Security Audit Log menu 217 security lock 82 127 175 security settings erasing 83 security settings information erasing 129 176 security Web page where to find 85 131 178 selecting a location for the printer
278. r hard disk Notes Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer Bookmarks print jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory Understanding the printer menus 238 Use To Format Flash Format the flash memory Yes Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is No being formatted Notes Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory Nocancels the format request Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in the printer The flash memory option card must not be read write or write protected This menu item appears only when a non defective flash memory card is installed Delete Downloads on Disk Delete downloads from the printer hard disk including all held jobs buffered jobs Delete Now and parked jobs Do Not Delete Notes Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to return to the originating screen after the deletion Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for touch screen printer models When selected in non touch screen printer models Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the deletion Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem
279. r its hard disk is stolen Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Opena Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Security Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed 3 From the Disk encryption menu select Enable Notes Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Touch Disk Encryption Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes Do notturn o
280. r menus 230 To Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed Notes Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape This is the factory default setting Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Notes Auto is the factory default setting This setting affects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the same menu is not set to Off Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Specify that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Notes Offisthe factory default setting The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side Paper Saver Border None Solid Print a border on each page image when using N Up pages per side Notes None is the factory default setting This setting affects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the same menu is not set to Off Paper Saver Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using N Up pages per side Notes Horizontal is the factory default setting Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape ori
281. r non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 284 Change paper source to custom string load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then select Finished changing paper For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to custom type name Try one or more of the following Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then select Finished changing paper For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Cancel the print job Change paper source to custom type name load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then select Finished changing paper For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Pape
282. r sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Notices 346 Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you speci
283. rer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK TR UK Cesky Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje Ze v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet EAnvik ME THN MAPOY A H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAQNEI OTI AYTO TO MPO ON ZYMMOPOONETAI lIPOX TIX OYZIOAEIZ ATIAITHZEIX KAI TIX AOITIEZ ZXETIKEX AIATAZEIZ TH OAHMAZ 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipme
284. ress in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Print Settings Supply Notifications 3 From the drop down menu for each supply select one of the following notification options Notification Description Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs E mail Only The printer generates an e mail when the supply condition is reached The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e mail about the status of the supply The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached Continuable Stop The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached and the user needs to press a button to continue printing Non Continuable Stopt The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached The supply must be replaced to continue printing 1 The printer generates an e mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage 4 Click Submit Modifying confidential print settings Note This feature is available only in network printers or prin
285. rinter hard disk is installed Once the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Note Off is the factory default setting NS M Understanding the printer menus 216 Use To Confidential Job Expiration Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted Off 1 hour Notes e f the Confidential Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value 4 hours 24 hours 1 week e Ifthe printer is turned off then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are deleted Repeat Job Expiration Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Verify Job Expiration Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Reserve Job Expiration Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Note Off is the factory default setting NS Disk Wiping menu Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Note Th
286. rk International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir pv a essi vara er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka Sis izstradajums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajjem noteikumiem Lietuviu Siuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad Sis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Matti Bil prezenti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa k
287. rmal processing is resumed The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus a Use Job Buffering 212 ao aa Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing off Notes On Auto Offis the factory default setting The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Protocol Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port DIR Notes DTR DSR XON XOFF DTRis the factory default setting XON XOFF DTR DTR DSR is a hardware handshaking setting XONXOFF DTRDSR XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and software
288. rol printers C Press Enter or click OK 2 Double click the printer icon 3 Select the print job you want to cancel 4 Click Delete For Macintosh users 1 From the Apple Menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Scan gt select a printer gt Open Print Queue System Preferences Print amp Fax select a printer Open Print Queue 2 From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel and then click Delete Managing your printer Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Checking the virtual display 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded W
289. rovides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to Reports Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected If the status is Not Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult your system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Checking the status of parts and supplies A message appears on the printer display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Notes Each gauge displays the estimated life left for the supply or part All page life estimates for supplies assume printing on a single side of letter or A4 size plain paper Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel From the home screen navigate to Status Supplies View Supplies Using MS812de 171 Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server Note Make sure that the computer and printer are connected to the same network 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Device
290. rrent printer status such as Ready or Busy Show printer conditions such as Imaging unit loworCartridge Low Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them 7 Status Supplies Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing View more information on the printer warning or message and on how to clear it 8 Tips Open a context sensitive Help information on the printer control panel he Features Feature Description Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks Warning If an error condition occurs then this icon appears Printer IP address The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the home Example 123 123 123 123 screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer V A Using the touch screen buttons Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Using MS812de 137 Menus gt Paper Menu Default Source Tray 1 e e Paper Size Type o Configure MP a Cassette Substitute Size a Statemen
291. ry default setting Remote Syslog Facility Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote 0 23 syslog server 4 is the factory default setting e f the security audit log is activated then the severity value of each event is Severity of events to log PE recorded 4 is the factory default setting M Set Date and Time menu Current Date and Time Show the current date and time settings for the printer Understanding the printer menus 218 Use To Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time input date time Notes For touch screen printer models date and time are set in YYYY MM DD HH MM format Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No For non touch screen printer models the wizard lets you set the date and time in YYYY MM DD HH MM format Time Zone Select the time zone list of time zones Note GMT is the factory default setting for non touch screen printer models Automatically observe DST Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time DST start and end times On associated with the printer Time Zone setting Off Note On is the factory default setting Enable NTP Enable Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a On network Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting The setting is turned off if you manually set the date and time Understanding the printer menus 219 Settin
292. ry default setting Storing downloads in the RAM is temporary Storing downloads in a flash memory or in a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in the flash memory or printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off This menu item appears only if an optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed Resource Save On Off Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in the RAM when the printer receives a print job that requires more than the available memory Notes Offisthe factory default setting Off sets the printer to retain downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs Onsets the printer to retain downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory then Memory Full 38 appears on the printer display but downloads are not deleted Print All Order Alphabetical Oldest First Newest First Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Alphabetical is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 233 Finishing menu Use To Sides Duplex Specify whether two sided duplex printing is set as the default for all print jobs 1 sided Notes 2 sided 1 sided is the factory default setting
293. ry low 88 xy 283 Cartridge imaging unit mismatch 41 xy 283 Change paper source to custom string 283 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 284 Change paper source to custom type name 284 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 284 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 284 Change paper source to paper type paper size 284 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation 285 Check tray x connection 285 Close door or insert cartridge 285 Close finisher side door 285 Close front door 285 Complex page some data may not have printed 39 286 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 286 Defective flash detected 51 286 Disk corrupted 286 Disk full 62 286 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space 287 Empty the hole punch box 287 Error reading USB drive Remove USB 287 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 287 Fuser kit early wear warning 81 xx 287 Fuser kit near end of life 81 xx 287 Imaging unit low 84 xy 287 360 Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy 288 Imaging unit very low 84 xy 288 Incompatible output bin x 59 288 Incompatible tray x 59 288 Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 288 Insert hole punch box 289 Insert staple cartridge 289 Insert Tray x 289 Install bin x 289 Install Tray x 289 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragmen
294. s Do not display is the factory default setting for When to display Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display Understanding the printer menus Use Displayed Information continued Paper Jam Load Paper Service Errors 223 To Customize the displayed information for Paper Jam Load Paper and Service Errors Select from the following options Display Yes No Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models No is the factory default setting for Display Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display Home screen customization Change Language Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles and Solutions Bookmarks Jobs by user Change the icons and buttons that appear on the printer control panel For each icon or button select from the following options Display Do not display Notes Profiles and Solutions appears only in touch screen printer models Display is the factory default setting for Search Held Jobs Held jobs and USB Drive Do not display is the factory default setting for Change Language Profiles and Solutions Bookmarks and Jobs by user Home screen customization Forms and Favorites Background and Idle Screen Eco Settings Change the icons and buttons that appear on the printer control panel
295. s Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment CEO Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the
296. s separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Do one or more of the following Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions a Click Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen Note If you clear a check box beside an icon then the icon does not appear on the home screen c Click Submit Customize the icon for an application For more information see Finding information about the home screen applications on page 92 or see the documentation that came with the application Activating the home screen applications Finding information about the home screen applications Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications Before you can use these applications you must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server For more information on accessing the Embedded Web Server see Accessing the Embedded Web Server on page 92 Using MS810de 93 For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications do the following 1 Goto http support lexmark com and then click SELECT YOUR PRODUCT gt gt 2 Do either of the following Click Business Solutions and then select the name of the application Click Software and Solutions Other Apps 3 Click the Manuals tab and then select the document for the home screen application Using Background and Idle Screen Icon
297. s causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus Use Advanced Status On 210 VO Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes Off On is the factory default setting Off disables parallel port negotiation Protocol Specify the parallel port protocol Standard Notes Fastbytes Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Honor Init Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the On computer Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on Parallel Mode 2 On Off Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on
298. s closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray 2 Adjust the width and length guides Loading A5 size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5 Using MS810de 102 b Squeeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place c Remove the A5 length guide from its holder d Insert the A5 length guide into its designated slot Note Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place Using MS810de 103 s f Loading A4 letter legal oficio and folio size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Using MS810de 104 b Ifthe A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide then remove it from its place If the A5 length guide is not attached then proceed to step d c Putthe A5 length guide in its holder Using MS810de 105 d Squeeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper is loaded properly There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Using MS810de One sided printing One sided printing Two sided
299. s connected temporarily to an Ethernet network A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with your wireless network adapter 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Network Ports Wireless Additional printer setup 41 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point wireless router Note Make sure to enter the correct SSID Click Submit 5 Turn off the printer and then disconnect the Ethernet cable Then wait for at least five seconds and then turn the printer back on To verify if your printer is connected to the network print a network setup page Then in the Network Card x section see if the status is Connected For more information see the Verifying printer setup section of the User s Guide Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed in the printer the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a n
300. s inserted Remove the USB device and then insert a supported one Error reading USB hub Remove hub An unsupported USB hub has been inserted Remove the USB hub and then install a supported one Fuser kit early wear warning 81 xx 1 Order a replacement fuser 2 From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Fuser kit near end of life 81 xx 1 Replace the fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Imaging unit low 84 xy You may need to order an imaging unit If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press LOK to confirm Troubleshooting 288 Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Imaging unit very low 84 xy You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon For more information see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch
301. s loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Vinyl Labels Texture Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Bond Texture Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Rough is the factory default setting Normal M Understanding the printer menus 194 a Use LEO Envelope Texture Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Rough Envelope Texture Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray Rough Note Rough is the factory default setting Letterhead Texture Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Preprinted Texture Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Colored Texture Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Light Texture Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Heavy Texture Specify th
302. screen printer models Paper Sizes Metric Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes Notes US is the factory default setting The initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard Understanding the printer menus SS SSS Use Displayed Information Left side Right side 222 I Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the printer control panel For the Left side and Right side options select from the following options None IP Address Hostname Contact Name Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Custom Text x Model Name Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models P Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side Displayed Information continued Custom Text x Customize displayed information that will appear on the upper left and right corners of the printer control panel Note This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Displayed Information continued Black Toner Customize the displayed information for Black Toner Select from the following options When to display Do not display Display Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer model
303. screen printer models press OK to confirm Incompatible output bin x 59 Try one or more of the following Remove the indicated bin Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified bin For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Incompatible tray x 59 Try one or more of the following Remove the specified tray From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 Try one or more of the following Load the correct size of paper in the tray From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Check the tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in the Printing Preferences or in the Print dialog Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel Make sure that the paper size is correctly set For example if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 289 Insert hole punch box Insert th
304. sesesueeseeesseenaes 49 Loading the 2100 sheet tray 4e REUS tereti cte egt 55 Loading the multipurpose feeder e eee tet n eed ER Te eves 62 Linking and unlinking trays eise cte te Die cete cero ee RI sedececisdaniodseencdedsdeueideneedeseieaeeess 67 laic IT x 68 Printing a doc ment dandi iini rE ar aaa ee ca REIHE locas Ta EEEa eR ideae raa EE e e duo Eee dew dg 68 Printing froma Thash Give teret tern ero testis GR tei tat ERTMERR 70 Printing confidential and other held jobs ccsscscccsssssssceecessssseecesesnsecesceessaseecescecueeeeessessaseees nennen nnne nnne 71 Printing information pages ccscsssccccesssssssecescssssececcssessseeeeceseeececessesssecescessssseeeesceesueeeeesses sensn sanis eene n nennen 73 Canceling a print job RR dte aae 73 Managing your printer 1 n n eoe eine cca oad tear Leve eo Dev de ees aaa ee Rr de Yea e es 74 Finding advanced networking and administrator information eee 74 Checking the virtual display 5 ree eec et Du e Ue e as idee dee ee 74 Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server cccsscccceesesesseeecessesaeecessssssesessneaeeens 74 Modifying confidential print settings eene eene enne nnne nennen isse nnn nn rennen nennen nenne 75 Copying printer settings to other printers seirene ei aia e Ai a raia anir iaaa rae ainar aa 76 Printing menu settings paBe 5 erred et oie e aneka aaaeaii e ana aa Dre aande sade agen Ra
305. setting Manual Envelope From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting If two trays contain paper of the same size and type and the trays have the same settings then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job continues using the linked tray is Paper Size Type menu Use To Tray x Size Specify the paper size loaded in each tray A4 Notes A5 A6 Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory JIS B5 default setting Letter If two trays contain paper of the same size and type and the trays have Legal the same settings then the trays are automatically linked The multipurpose feeder may also be linked When one tray is empty the Executive print job continues using the linked tray Oficio Mexico The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and the multipurpose Folio feeder Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu X M Understanding the printer menus Use Tray x Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x 190 oO Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray Notes Plain Paper is the f
306. setup 39 Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network SSID The SSID is also referred to as the network name Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select Security Method There are three basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key then enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key or WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network 802 1X RADIUS If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network then you may need the following Authentication type nner authentication type 802 1X user name and password Certificates No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended Notes f you do not know
307. sh detected 51 Try one or more of the following Replace the defective flash memory card From the printer control panel select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press E3 to confirm Cancel the current print job Disk corrupted Select Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Note Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk Disk full 62 Try one or more of the following Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the printer hard disk nstall a printer hard disk with larger capacity Troubleshooting 287 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space Try one or more of the following Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the printer hard disk nstall a hard disk with higher capacity Empty the hole punch box 1 Empty the hole punch box For instructions on emptying the hole punch box from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Reinsert the hole punch box into the finisher and then touch Continue to clear the message Error reading USB drive Remove USB An unsupported USB device i
308. sided The short edge without holes enters the printer first Multipurpose feeder One sided The short edge with holes enters the printer first Two sided The short edge without holes enters the printer first Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur Allow the paper to enter the optional mailbox bins properly Make sure to adjust the bin extender so that the paper size indicators match the size of the paper used Notes Ifthe bin extender is shorter than the size of the paper you are printing on then the paper causes a jam in the mailbox bin For example if you are printing on a legal size paper and the bin extender is set to letter size then a jam occurs Clearing jams 263 Ifthe bin extender is longer than the size of the paper you are printing on then the edges become uneven and the paper is not stacked properly For example if you are printing on a letter size paper and the bin extender is set to legal size then the paper does not stack properly f paper needs to be returned to the mailbox bin then insert the paper under the bin arm and then push the paper all the way back Note If the paper is not under the bin arm then a jam occurs due to an overfilled bin Use recommended paper Use only recommended paper or specialty media Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper Flex and straighten
309. sorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled XX Yes Contact customer support 323 EN The problem is solved Print irregularities Leading edge a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Step 2 Go to step 3 Specify the paper size From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper and type from the tray menu to match the paper loaded in the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in tray the tray Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved Step 4 Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper r From the printer control panel set the paper texture in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Go to step 5 Troubleshooting 324 a Action Yes No Step 5 Go to step 6 The
310. specialty media guide 180 Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes Before loading the envelopes on the tray flex the envelopes back and forth to loosen them Straighten the edges on a level surface Note A combination of high humidity over 6096 and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Tips on using labels From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels loaded in the tray Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities For more information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Use labels designed specifically for laser printers Do not use labels with slick backing material Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the printer and toner cartridge warranties Do not use labels with exposed adhesive Tips on using transparencies From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the transparencies loaded in the tray Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers Avoid
311. staple finisher and then remove the jammed paper x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 200 201 A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 1 Lift the front cover and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door Clearing jams 266 2 Lift the green handle and then pull the toner cartridge out of the printer 3 Place the cartridge aside 4 Lift the green handle and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer 5 Place the imaging unit aside on a flat smooth surface Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 6 Pull the jammed paper gently to the right and then remove it from the printer Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Warning Potential Damage The jammed paper may be covered with toner which can stain garments and skin Clearing jams 267 7 Install the imaging unit Note Use the arrows on the side of the printer as a guide 8 Insert the cartridge into the printer and then push the green handle back into place Notes Align the arrows on the guides of the toner cartridge with the arrows in the printer Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in 9 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover Cl
312. t A5 Paper Texture o j 8 7 6 5 4 Touch To 1 j Leftarrow Scroll to the left 2 Right arrow Scroll to the right 3 Up arrow Scroll up 4 Down arrow Scroll down 5 Submit Submit changes made in the printer settings 6 Back Return to the previous screen 7 Home Return to the home screen Using MS812de 138 8 Tips Open a context sensitive Help dialog on the printer control panel Accept Save settings Cancel Cancel an action or a selection Leave a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes Increase Select a higher value Decrease Select a lower value Exit Leave the current screen Search Search current held jobs Warning View a warning or error message Using MS812de 139 Setting up and using the home screen applications Notes Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded applications Some applications are supported only in select printer models There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase For more information visit www lexmark com or inquire at your point of purchase Accessing the Embedded Web Server The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 1 Obtai
313. t Mode Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer Off On Notes For touch screen printer models touch Quiet Mode and then select from the options e Offis the factory default setting This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible This setting is best suited for printing text and line art Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing Run Initial setup Instruct the printer to run the setup wizard Yes No Notes Yes is the factory default setting After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen the default becomes No Understanding the printer menus z Use Keyboard Keyboard Type English Francais Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Korean Magyar Turkish Czech Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Japanese Custom Key 1 Custom Key 2 221 zo Specify a language and custom key information for the printer control panel keyboard The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and symbols from the keypad on the printer control panel Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Custom Key 2 appears only in select touch
314. t Recording or non MICR supplies Note For a list of supported supplies see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com 2 Change the toner cartridge or imaging unit so that both are MICR or non MICR supplies Notes Use MICR toner cartridge and imaging unit for printing checks and other similar documents Use non MICR toner cartridge and imaging unit for regular print jobs Cartridge low 88 xy You may need to order a toner cartridge If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Cartridge nearly low 88 xy If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Cartridge very low 88 xy You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon For more information see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Change paper source to custom string Try one or more of the following Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then select Finished changing paper Fo
315. t conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 2009 125 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy related products The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power ofthis device isfar below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inch
316. t menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings For more information see Printing a menu settings page on page 122 If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings then perform the Wipe All Settings option For more information see Erasing non volatile memory on page 129 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected From the home screen navigate to ai Settings General Settings Factory Defaults Restore Now ZS Securing the printer Using the security lock feature The printer is equipped with a security lock feature When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached the printer is locked When locked the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be removed Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown Using MS810de 128 Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings and user data Type of memory Description Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory RAM to temporarily buffer user
317. t operation 37 290 Insufficient memory to collate job 37 290 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 290 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 290 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 290 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation 291 Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation 291 Load paper source with paper size paper orientation 291 Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation 292 Load manual feeder with custom string paper orientation 292 Load manual feeder with custom type name paper orientation 292 Load manual feeder with paper size paper orientation 292 Load manual feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation 293 Load staples 291 Maintenance kit low 80 xy 293 Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy 293 Maintenance kit very low 80 xy 293 Memory full 38 293 Index Network x software error 54 293 Non Lexmark supply type see User s Guide 33 xy 294 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 294 Paper changes needed 295 Parallel port x disabled 56 295 PPDS font error 50 294 Reattach bin x 295 Reattach bins x y 295 Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy 296 Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy 296 Remove defective disk 61 296 Remove packaging material area name
318. ta a aane ane cep Saad 76 Printing a network setup page eei a id ducet ete tuendi occidi dete dte Reels tutt ect iet 77 Checking the status of parts and supplies ececessececcessseseecescsesueeceecsessnsececessseecessssueeescesssaaaeseessesesssaeeees 77 Saving eherBys i edes eere de eere near tp a a dene L macer ee eer E e nd ru dae erba ev PETERE fens 77 Restoring factory defa lt settings c oe Reti bt ed et bates 81 Securing the printer ce ee eie eed ed eae Hive e eec restes sete te eee eye eee ets 82 Using MS810d68 istnd is eeco S soenoe iet ean CEEREEVA INE ka faa Eee pes coria vent ipdet DD Learning about the printer rre teorie eter reete ey iei ate Fete cea esee oae Nene cue gel Le ea OP aeneus 86 Printer configurations ec eR Ro Dea iiie nei te 86 Using the printer control panel oer ient e detecte tee IERI IRR Qe iot iea ise re dans 88 Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights eese 88 Understanding the home screen cccccccesssssceecessssececessesseeeceesessaeeeeescssseecesssssaeeeesenesseecesesessuseeeseseseseeaaeseseees 89 Using the TOUCH SCrEEN BUTTONS ete RES Eee per ei t eie De iege ete e eyed 90 Setting up and using the home screen applications sees ennemis 92 Accessing the Embedded Web Servet mirra heei ia ee eae en neris nenne nensis sene nn nena n nennen nns 92 C stomizing thehiome sereen eee edet e Ue re eite dye e ETRAS 92 Activ
319. table below AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE EL ES Fl FR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK TR UK esky E Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje Ze v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet EAAnviKh ME THN NAPOYSZA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAQNEI OTI AYTO TO NPOION ZYMMOPOONETAI NPOZ TIZ OYZIOAEIZ ANAITHZEIZ KAI TIZ AOITIEX ZXETIKEZ AIATAZEI2 TH OAHMAZ 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Notices 354 Espa ol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Lexma
320. tatus bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the Enable Disable screen 5 Touch Back Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Finding printer security information In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed For more information visit the Lexmark security Web page and see the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide 1 Goto http support lexmark com and then navigate to Support amp Downloads Tech Library Manuals amp Guides 2 Type Embedded Web Server in the keyword field and then click Filter 3 Click Embedded Web Server to launch the document Paper and specialty media guide 179 Paper and specialty media guide Notes Make sure the paper size type and weight are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel Flex and straighten specialty media before loading it The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser For more information on card stock and labels see the Card Stock amp Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site http support lexmark com Using specialty media Tips on using card stock Card stock is heavy single ply specialty media Many of its variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness
321. te write or password protected Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100 PCL Emul menu Use To Font Source Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu Resident Notes Disk Download e Resident is the factory default setting Resident shows the factory Flash default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM All Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read write write or password protected Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM All shows all fonts available to any option Font Name Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored Courier 10 Note Courier 10 is the factory default setting Courier 10 shows the font name font ID and the storage location in the printer The font source abbreviation is R for Resident F for Flash K for Disk and D for Download Sa J Understanding the printer menus Use Symbol Set 10U PC 8 12U PC 850 240 oO Specify the symbol set for each font name Notes 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting Asymbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown PCL Emulation Sett
322. tep 2 Step 2 a Check the original file for manual page breaks b Resend the print job Did the file print correctly XX The problem is solved Contact customer support M Troubleshooting 312 Hardware and internal option problems 2100 sheet tray problems Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Pull out the tray and then do one or more of the following Make sure paper lies flat in the tray Check for paper jams or misfeeds Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type Check if the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged b Insert the tray properly Note Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray Does the tray operate properly Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Turn offthe printer then wait about 10 seconds and then turn it back on Does the tray operate properly Step 3 Go to step 4 For more information Print a menu settings page and then check if the tray is listed in the see the setup sheet Installed Options list that came with the i 2100 sheet tray Note If the tray is listed in the menu settings page but paper j
323. ter 72 118 166 printing from Windows 72 118 166 Help menu 243 Hibernate Mode using 126 Hibernate mode using 80 173 hiding icons on the home screen 92 139 hole punch box emptying 258 Home button printer control panel 47 88 134 home screen buttons understanding 89 135 customizing 92 139 hiding icons 92 139 showing icons 92 139 home screen applications configuring 92 139 finding information 92 139 home screen buttons understanding 89 135 HTML menu 242 l icons on the home screen hiding 92 139 showing 92 139 Image menu 243 imaging unit ordering 249 replacing 253 Imaging unit low 84 xy 287 Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy 288 Imaging unit very low 84 xy 288 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 94 141 Incompatible output bin x 59 288 Incompatible tray x 59 288 Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 288 indicator light 134 printer control panel 47 88 individual settings erasing 83 individual settings information erasing 129 176 Insert hole punch box 289 Insert staple cartridge 289 Insert Tray x 289 Install bin x 289 Install Tray x 289 installing an Internal Solutions Port 18 installing an optional card 23 357 installing options order of installation 31 installing printer hard disk 24 installing printer on a network Ethernet networking 37 installing printer software 35 adding options 36 installing the 2100 sheet tray 31 installing the 250 sheet tra
324. ter display then clear the message Note The printer continues to print after clearing the message Do the jobs print Step 4 The problem is solved Go to step 5 a Check if the ports USB serial or Ethernet are working and if the cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer Note For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Step 5 The problem is solved Go to step 6 Troubleshooting Action Step 6 a Remove and then reinstall the printer software For more information see Installing the printer software on page 35 Note The printer software is available at http support lexmark com b Resend the print job Do the jobs print NS Yes The problem is solved 310 oo Contact customer support M Printing slows down Notes When printing using narrow paper the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time or printing at elevated temperatures Action a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser type Note To identify the fuser type view the label on the fuser b Resend the print job Does the print speed increase X Yes The problem is solved P Contact customer support at http support lexmar k com or your service representat
325. ter menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Touch Wipe Disk and then touch one of the following Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes Astatus bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Using MS810de 130 Configuring printer hard disk encryption Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer o
326. ters connected to print servers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Configuration Other Settings tab Security Confidential Print Setup Using MS810de 122 3 Modify the settings e Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts When a user exceeds that number all of the jobs for that user are deleted Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs When a user has not printed the jobs within that time all of the jobs for that user are deleted 4 Save the modified settings Copying printer settings to other printers Note This feature is available only in network printers 1 Opena Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Copy Printer Settings 3 Tochange the language select a language from the drop down menu and then click Click here to submit language 4 Click Printer Settings 5 Type the IP addresses of the source and target pri
327. th a document open click File gt Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust the settings if necessary d Click OK gt Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded 3 Click OK b Customize the settings in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options pop up menus adjust the settings if necessary Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Adjusting toner darkness 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Print Settings Quality Menu Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the toner darkness and then click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 2 Adjust the setting and then touch Submit Using
328. the internal print server is supported by the printer Note An internal print server from another printer may not work with this printer Step 2 Check the cable and the internal print server connection Use the correct cable and then check if it is securely connected to the internal print server Does the internal print server operate correctly s The problem is solved Contact customer support M Tray problems P Action Step 1 a Open the tray and do one or more of the following Check for paper jams or misfeeds Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray f youare printing on custom size paper then make sure that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Make sure paper lies flat in the tray b Check if the tray closes properly Is the tray working Yes The problem is solved Go to step 2 Step 2 a Turn off the printer then wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on b Resend the print job Is the tray working The problem is solved Go to step 3 Step 3 Check if the tray is installed Print a menu settings page and then check if the tray is listed in the Installed Options list Is the tray listed in the menu settings page Ns Go to step 4 Reinstall the tray For
329. the leading or trailing edge of a strobe Note On is the factory default setting Mac Binary PS On Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes Off Auto Auto is the factory default setting e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs ENA Address Set the network address information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask Set the netmask information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Gateway Set the gateway information for an external print server YYY YYY YYV YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Serial x menu Note This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed Understanding the printer menus Use 211 To PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitc
330. the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 67 Linking and unlinking trays Linking and unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu 3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking To link trays make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray Tounlink trays make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray 4 Click Submit Note You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel For more information see Setting the paper size and type on page 48 Warning Potential Damage Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured Creating a custom name for a paper type Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then
331. till occur frequently The problem is solved Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared Action a Do either of the following For touch screen printer models touch ZS or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK f b Follow the instructions on the printer display Does the paper jam message remain NS Yes Contact customer support The problem is solved Troubleshooting Print quality problems Characters have jagged or uneven edges N ABC DEF Action Step 1 a Printa font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported by the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to Menus gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Select PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts b Resend the print job Are you using fonts that are supported by the printer Yes Go to step 2 318 Select a font that is supported by the printer Step 2 Check if the fonts installed on the computer are supported by the printer Are the fonts installed on the computer supported by the printer NS The problem is solved Contact customer support Clipped pages or images Leading edge Trailing edge Action Step 1 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper loaded b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped
332. ting for all print jobs with Card Stock as the paper type Recycled Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Recycled Duplex as the paper type Off Labels Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Labels as Duplex the paper type Off Vinyl Labels Loading Duplex Off Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Vinyl Labels as the paper type Bond Loading Duplex Off Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Bond as the paper type Notes Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections Duplex sets the printer default to two sided printing for every print job unless one sided printing is selected from Print Properties or the print dialog depending on your operating system Understanding the printer menus Use Letterhead Loading Duplex Off To as the paper type Preprinted Loading Duplex Off as the paper type Colored Loading Duplex Off as the paper type Light Loading Duplex Off the paper type Heavy Loading Duplex Off the paper type Rough Cotton Loading Duplex Off Cotton as the paper type Custom x Loading Duplex as the paper type Off Note Custom x Loading is available only when the custom type is supported Notes Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections Du
333. tion 37 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Delete fonts macros and other data from the printer memory nstall additional printer memory Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory Insufficient memory to collate job 37 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job For non touch screen printer models press E3 to confirm Cancel the current print job Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 Install additional printer memory or select Continue on the printer control panel to disable Resource Save clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Troubleshooting 291 Load staples Try one
334. tion time for confidential print jobs When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified time all of the jobs for that user are deleted 4 Save the modified settings Copying printer settings to other printers Note This feature is available only in network printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click the Copy Printer Settings 3 Tochange the language select a language from the drop down menu and then click Click here to submit language 4 Click Printer Settings 5 Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers in their appropriate fields Note If you want to add or remove a target printer then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP 6 Click Copy Printer Settings Printing a menu settings page Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify if the printer options are installed correctly Note If you have not changed any menu settings then the menu settings page lists all the factory default settings When you select and save other settings from the menus they replace the factory default settings as user default settings A user default setting remains in eff
335. tiple copies of a document Usethe preview feature which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look like before you print it Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy Saving money and the environment 246 Avoid paper jams Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 261 Recycling Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle Recycling Lexmark products To return Lexmark products for recycling 1 Goto www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept Recycling Lexmark packaging Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging Less packaging helpsto ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging
336. to clear it 8 Tips View a context sensitive help information M This may also appear on the home screen Touch To Search Held Jobs Search current held jobs Jobs by user Access print jobs saved by user Profiles and Solutions Access profiles and solutions J Features Feature Description Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks Warning If an error condition occurs then this icon appears Printer IP address The IP address of your printer is located at the top left corner of the home screen Example 123 123 123 123 and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server to view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer r J Using the touch screen buttons Note Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Using MS810de 91 Touch the To Radio button Select or clear an item Up arrow Scroll up Down arrow Scroll down Accept button Save a setting uU NH Cancel button Cancelan action or a selection Return to the previous screen 2 Other touch screen buttons Touch C H Return to the home scree
337. tray Using MS812de 148 Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams 6 For custom or universal size paper adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack and then lock the length guide 7 Insert the tray 8 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS812de 149 Loading the 2100 sheet tray CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray 2 Adjust the width and length guides Loading A5 size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5 Using MS812de 150 b Squeeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place c Remove the A5 length guide from its holder d Insert the A5 length guide into its designated slot Note Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place Using MS812de 151 s f Loading A4 letter legal oficio and folio size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Using MS812de 152 b Ifthe A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide then remove it from
338. ts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server Note Make sure the computer and printer are connected to the same network 1 Opena Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Device Status More Details Saving energy Using Eco Mode 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 78 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode 3 Select a setting Use Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode Notes Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory default settings Off supports the performance specifications of the printer Energy Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle Notes Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready t
339. tting Understanding the printer menus a Use Disk Near Full Action None E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current 237 ao M Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full Notes Noneis the factory default setting The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered Disk Full Action None E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit 100MB Note None is the factory default setting URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs E mail to Send Logs Specify the e mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name Note The current host name defined in the TCP IP menu is used as the default log file prefix Utilities menu Use Remove Held Jobs Confidential Held Not Restored All TOE Delete confidential and held jobs from the printe
340. tting is 30 minutes Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 3 Inthe Sleep Mode field enter the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to A gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts gt Sleep Mode 2 Inthe Sleep Mode field select the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 3 Touch v Using MS810de 126 Using Hibernate Mode Hibernate is an ultra low power operating mode When operating in Hibernate mode the printer is essentially off and all other systems and devices are powered down safely Note The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Opena Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load
341. type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Paper Menu Custom Names 3 Select a custom name and then type a new custom paper type name 4 Click Submit 5 Click Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Using the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Paper Menu gt LOK gt Custom Names 2 Select a custom name and then type a new custom paper type name Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 68 3 Press m 4 Press Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Assigning a custom paper type Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Paper Menu Custom Types 3 Select a custom paper type name and th
342. uct is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed Fuser Units Transfer Transport Units Paper Feed items if any and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a Life Warning or Scheduled Maintenance message for such item To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service involves the exchan
343. umption Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing supplies based on the estimate Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer initial estimates assume future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization test methods and page content Average continuous black declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO IEC 19752 Ordering toner cartridges Notes Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO IEC 19752 standard Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield Item Return Program cartridge For the United States and Canada Toner Cartridge 521 This toner cartridge is supported only in MS811n MS811dn MS812dn and MS812ne printer models For more information on countries located in each region visit www lexmark com regions NS 249 Maintaining the printer a Item Return Program cartridge High Yield Toner Cartridge 521H Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 521X For the European Union European Economic Area and Switzerland Toner Cartridge 522 High Yield Toner Cartridge 522H Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 522X For the Asia Pacific Region includes Australia and New Zealand Toner Cartridge 523 High Yield Toner Cartridge 523H Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 523X For Latin America includes Puerto Rico and Mexic
344. unch holes in it The finisher staples the paper if it is loaded short edge first M Supported paper types and weights Paper type Paper weight 4 bin mailbox Output expander Staple finisher Staple hole punch and high capacity finisher output expander Plain Paper 2 p 90 176 g m x j x x 24 47 Ib 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib v v v v Card Stock 163 g m x J v 110 Ib Transparency 146 g m X 39 ib v v v Recycled 90 176 g m d g m X vV X X 24 47 Ib 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib v v v v Paper labels 180 g m d X X X 48 Ib Vinyl Labels 300 g m y g m x J 92 Ib The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it lt Paper and specialty media guide 187 Paper type Paper weight 4 bin mailbox Output expander Staple finisher Staple hole punch and high capacity finisher output expander Dual web and 180 g m Integrated 48 Ib X V X X Polyester 220 g m y g x J x 59 Ib Bond 90 176 g m oo X v X X 24 47 Ib 60 90 g m J J J J 16 24 Ib Envelope 105 P g m x J x 28 Ib Letterhead 17 2 90 176 g m X J x x 24 47 Ib 60 90 g m J J J J 16 24 Ib Preprinted 17 p 90 176 g m x J x x 24 47 Ib 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib v v v v Colored Paper 17 2 p 90 176 g m x d x 24 47 Ib 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib v v v v The finisher stacks the paper but does
345. untries Canada and Switzerland 1 month 3 days is the factory default setting for European Union countries Canada and Switzerland Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before Screen Timeout 15 300 sec returning the display to a ready state Note 30 sec is the factory default setting Timeouts Prolong Screen Timeout Off On Set the printer to continue the specified job without returning to the home screen when the Screen Timeout timer expires Notes Prolong Screen Timeout appears only in touch screen printer models Onallows the user to reset the Screen Timeout timer instead of returning to ready state Off follows the normal Screen Timeout value Off is the factory default setting Timeouts Print Timeout Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end of job message before canceling the remainder of the print Disabled job 1 255 sec Notes 90 sec is the factory default setting When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional Wait Timeout data before canceling a print job Disabled 15 65535 sec Notes 40 sec is the
346. up 3 Modify the settings Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts all of the jobs for that user are deleted Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified time all of the jobs for that user are deleted 4 Save the modified settings Copying printer settings to other printers Note This feature is available only in network printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Using MS812de 170 Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Copy Printer Settings 3 Tochange the language select a language from the drop down menu and then click Click here to submit language 4 Click Printer Settings 5 Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers Note If you want to add or remove target printers then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP 6 Click Copy Printer Settings Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to Reports Menu Settings Page Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also p
347. up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 14 2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the controller board leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out JALAN Additional printer setup 3 Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place 4 Remove the printer hard disk 5 Set aside the printer hard disk 30 Additional printer setup 31 Installing hardware options Order of installation A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electri
348. urpose feeder cartridge 200 201 then remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit and then remove the jammed paper 4 Multipurpose feeder x page jam clear manual Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder and feeder 250 then remove the jammed paper 5 Duplex area x page jam remove tray 1 to clear Pull out tray 1 completely then push the front duplex duplex 235 239 flap down and then remove the jammed paper 6 Trays x page jam open tray x 24x Pull out the indicated tray and then remove the jammed paper Clearing jams 265 Jam location Printer message What to do door finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451 7 Output expander x page jam remove paper open Open the rear door of the output expander and then expander rear door Leave paperin remove the jammed paper bin 43y xx 8 Upper rear door x page jam open upper rear Open the rear door of the printer and then remove door 202 the jammed paper 9 Upper door and rear x page jam open upper and lower Open the rear door of the printer and the rear duplex duplex area rear door 231 234 area and then remove the jammed paper 10 Mailbox x page jam remove paper open Open the rear door of the mailbox and then remove mailbox rear door Leave paper in the jammed paper bin 41y xx 11 Staple finisher rear x page jam remove paper open Open the rear door of the
349. utes Note The printer still accepts print jobs when in Sleep mode Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Navigate to Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 3 In the Sleep Mode field enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Settings gt OK gt General Settings gt OK gt Timeouts gt OK gt Sleep Mode gt OK 2 In the Sleep Mode field select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode 3 Press OK Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 80 Using Hibernate mode Hibernate is an ultra low power operating mode When operating in Hibernate mode all other systems and devices are powered down safely Notes Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job A hard reset or a long press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode fthe printer is in Hibernate mode then the Embedded Web Server is disabl
350. utlet Remove the tray Contact customer support Toclearthe message and resumethe job select Continue on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press E3 to confirm Close door or insert cartridge The toner cartridge is missing or not installed properly Insert the cartridge and then close all doors and covers Close finisher side door Close the side door of the finisher Close front door Close the front door of the printer Troubleshooting 286 Complex page some data may not have printed 39 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Cancel the current print job For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Install additional printer memory Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 Held jobs are invalidated because of any of the following possible changes in the printer The printer firmware has been updated The tray for the print job is removed The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer model From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Defective fla
351. waste content Temperature and humidity conditions Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world e Moisture content Business papers should have low moisture 4 596 Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer Thickness impacts how much can be loaded into a tray Surface roughness measured in Sheffield units impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper Surface friction determines how easily sheets can be separated Grain and formation impacts curling which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer Brightness and texture look and feel Recycled papers are better than ever however the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner they are not perfect The energy required to de ink and deal with additives such as colorants and glue often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production However using recycled papers enables better resource management overall Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the
352. which still consumes a small amount of power then to completely stop product power consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage Notices 344 STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS LEXMARK LED PRINTERS AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product s manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts ls during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option If this prod
353. wlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE Apple Chancery Apple Computer Inc Arial The Monotype Corporation plc CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Chicago Apple Computer Inc Clarendon Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Eurostile Nebiolo Geneva Apple Computer Inc GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc Helvetica Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc Marigold Arthur Baker Monaco Apple Computer Inc Notices 341 New York Apple Computer Inc Oxford Arthur Baker Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subs
354. ximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy related products Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 1999 5 EC and 2009 125 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use Notices 349 within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy related products Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufactu
355. y and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 From the printer control panel release the print job For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt Ok gt Reports gt OK gt Print Fonts 2 Press the up or down arrow button to select the font setting 3 Press mn Note The PPDS fonts appear only when the PPDS data stream is activated Printing a directory list From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt Reports gt OK gt Print Directory gt OK Note The Print Directory menu item appears only when an optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel From the printer control panel press x gt ok Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 74 Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder a Click or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type cont
356. y 31 installing the 550 sheet tray 31 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 290 Insufficient memory to collate job 37 290 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 290 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 290 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 290 internal options 13 internal print server troubleshooting 314 Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 41 installing 18 troubleshooting 315 IPv6 menu 205 J jams accessing 263 avoiding 261 understanding messages 263 jams clearing behind rear door 268 269 in duplex area 271 in finisher rear door 278 in mailbox rear door 279 in multipurpose feeder 273 in rear expander door 281 in standard bin 271 in staple finisher 274 in the tray 272 inside the printer 265 Job Accounting menu 236 K keypad printer control panel 47 88 134 Index L labels paper tips 180 letterhead loading 2100 sheet tray 55 101 149 loading multipurpose feeder 62 108 156 loading trays 49 95 143 linking trays 67 113 114 161 162 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation 291 Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation 291 Load paper source with paper size paper orientation 291 Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation 292 Load manual feeder with custom string paper orientation 292 Load manual feeder with custom typ
357. y unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Notices 351 Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC and 2006 95 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor
358. ze from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Are the margins correct s The problem is solved Contact customer support Paper curl Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Adjust the width and Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for length guides the size of the paper loaded Are the width and length guides positioned correctly Step 2 Go to step 3 Specify the paper type From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper and weight from the menu to match the paper loaded in the tray tray settings to match the paper loaded in the Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in tray the tray Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Remove the paper from the tray and then turn it over b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled bs Troubleshooting a Action Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper ab
359. ze paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn b Squeeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place c Remove the A5 length guide from its holder d Insert the A5 length guide into its designated slot Note Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place 56 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 57 si f Loading A4 letter legal oficio and folio size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 58 b Ifthe A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide then remove it from its place If the A5 length guide is not attached then proceed to step d C Put the A5 length guide in its holder Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 59 d Squeeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper is loaded properly There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

TZ-EHP080/TZ  Baby-Sitting Club Mode d`emploi  Parts Manual 06/2009 - Whaley Food Service  "取扱説明書"  Samsung Galaxy S4 Mini DUOS Manual de Usuario  Yosemite Home Decor TROPICAL BREEZE2-NLK Instructions / Assembly  Samsung Galaxy Note (10.1) manual do usuário(CLARO)  日カ" ==自 〔ー23-335 剛2。キョウツゥセツメイショJC 繍ゝ野 ブ==臂六 〇  INSIDE - Palais de Tokyo  Ersatzteillisten Bull Top  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file